Software Changes Log (archived)

v4.270 14th December 2023

• When using the 'Large Window and Font Sizes' option to increase the size of nearly everything in the application, the 'Money Received' and 'Money Paid Out' options did not appear correctly. The buttons at the bottom were below the bottom level of the form, and could not be clicked. Fixed.
  
  
• When entering purchase invoices, if the cursor went into an empty Purchase Analysis code input field, a list of available Purchase Analysis codes should appear if you then try to exit the input field. But this stopped happening (it would would only work if clicking into the tax or 'Each' columns. Fixed.
  
  
• Payroll: In the employee payslip details, if the 'Change Tax & NI Figures' option was used. The tax amount always got set to 1.00 Fixed.
  
  

v4.269 8th December 2023

• The initial start up window has been improved.
  
  
• The application main menu bar has undergone substantial changes. It's now far more visually appealing, helpful, and customizable.
  
  
• Sales Prospecting: the 'Potential Prospects/Telesales' option now has an extra button to display a KPI analysis for each sales person.
  
  
• Sales Order Processing: orders/jobs in Production Control can now be listed in order/job number order.
  
  
• Sales Order Processing: the 'Goods/Service' and 'Quantity' columns are now clickable, and will bring up the cost item details to view or edit. Any changes to the cost details are then immediately reflected in Production Control, without having to re-load the data.
  
  
• Sales Order Processing: Production Control will only include cost items where the quantity is more than one. The idea being, if it's one, it's likely to be delivery or something similar. Now, in the cost item details, if the quantity is one or less, there is an option to include it in Production Control anyway.
  
  
• Sales Order Processing: In Production Control, you can now filter cost items according the item status.
  
  
• United Kingdom only: when creating a new tax year in the payroll, the previous year can now be copied into the new year (can save some typing).
  
  
• Customer statements can now have a cutoff date for transactions.
  
  
• AutoManager: If an invoice generated from a service/repair job was credited, the credit note would not put any stock items back into stock. However, once a job was invoiced, there is no way to return items back into stock. So, now any credit notes created from an invoice generated from Service Counter will automatically put any stock items back into stock.
  
  
• Sales transactions: when an invoice or credit note is deleted, any associated stock movement records are now also deleted, and the stock items rebalanced. This is makes it the same as for purchase transactions, which have always worked this way. Previously, when a sales transaction was deleted, the stock movements would remain, and another set of stock movements created to reverse the stock. But this sometimes lead to some confusion. This is not retrospective, so stock movements will remain for any transactions deleted prior to updating to v4.268
  
  
• Stock/Inventory Control: the stock item details window, when listing sales or purchases, now lists the invoice number or Sakes Order/Job number, or P/O number, as appropriate.
  
  
• If the company/organization details are edited, you can now change the country (though not the currency, that can only be changed via Setup -> Miscellaneous -> Currencies).
  
  
• Sales Order Processing: under certain settings, when stock was booked out from an order/job, and the order/job was then invoiced, the figures in the order/job showing quantity delivered could be doubled up. Fixed.
  
  
• Sales Order Processing: Production Control only showed the first two digits of the year in the 'Required' column (ie. just the century). Fixed. It now shows the last two digits instead.
  
  
• Sales Order Processing: Production Control can now have a delivery tracking number entered for one or more items, simply left click into the new 'Courier' column.
  
  
• AutoManager: Graph displaying sales from Parts Counter could not be re-sized. Fixed.
  
  
• When printing a copy of an invoice input from a supplier, any stock items that have a space in the stock code/SKU would not print correctly. Only the first part of the stock code/SKU up to the space would print. Fixed.
  
  
• Sales Order Processing: the 'Events' fields in Production Control did not display correctly. Fixed.
  
  
• Sales Order Processing: the 'Goods/Service' column in Production Control would cut long descriptions short, and would not display mult-line descriptions properly. Fixed.
  
  
• Sales Tax/VAT: if a company/organization was subject to sales tax/VAT, and default sales tax/VAT codes were set up in some customer, supplier, and/or stock item records, if the company/organization was de-registered for sales tax/VAT, the software would continue to use those default sales tax/VAT codes to calculate a tax due amount. Fixed.
  
  

v4.267 13th October 2023

• UK only: if operating VAT using the Cash Accounting method and applying advanced payments, in the 'VAT Period End' option, a 'Full Report' could produce odd figures (or even just stars, as in *) for the advanced payment figures. Fixed.
  
  
• When an email with one or more attached files was sent, if the email was later displayed, it would not include the attachments. Fixed. (note: it only saves the location and file name of attached files, not the file contents, so if a file no longer exists, although you will continue to see it's location and name it cannot be viewed or resent)
  
  

v4.266 6th October 2023

• Sales Prospecting: a new module has been added, to be used mainly for telesales. Rather than fill up the main prospect database with details of organizations/people who may or may not be interested in your products/services, this option exists to handle those 'suspects', or 'potential prospects' as they're called in Adminsoft Accounts. Sorry, but this module is only available to users who have purchased a software licence.
  
  
• General Ledger/Nominal Ledger: the 'Cash and Bank Accounts' option that displays the balance in each account, now also shows a total balance at the bottom.
  
  
• When a sales or purchase invoice was edited, if the tax date was changed, that date change was not reflected in the movements of any stock items, or in the items sales data (it only altered any quantities and/or prices). Fixed.
  
  
• AutoManager, Parts Counter: when a stock item was sold that had a sales discount set up on it, if the sales discount code had a different cost method setting to the default cost method setting in Stock/Inventory Control, it would use the cost method on the sales discount code to work out the cost of items sold. The cost method in the sales discount code should only be used to work out a retail price based on Markup on Cost. Fixed.
  
  
• Inventory/Stock Control: in stock item details, the 'Sales by Month' button displays the sales of the selected item for each calendar month. But selecting a month and clicking 'List Sales for the Month' would not include any items booked in/out from the AutoManager Service Counter module. Fixed.
• Inventory/Stock Control: in stock item details, the 'Reserved Stock' list would not list items from a Sales Order. Fixed.
  
  
• Sales Order Processing: in a Sales order, if any controlled stock items that were linked to costs, were booked out using the 'Items Delivered to Customers' option in the 'Charges to Customer' section, if the items were on reserve, the reserve quantity (and list of reserved items) would not be updated. Fixed.
  
  
• Sales Order Processing: in a Sales Order, any stock items in costs that were reserved, when one of the 'Copy Cost to Charges' options were used, the retail price in the stock reserved record would not be set with the retail price. Fixed.
  
  
• Sales Order Processing: in a Sales Order, if any stock items in the charges section that were on reserve and their retail price changed, that change would not be reflected in the stock reserved record. Fixed.
  
  
• Inventory/Stock Control: when any stock items were sold in the month of September, the sales analysis for the item would show the sales as being in August. Fixed.
  
  

v4.265 12th September 2023

• When allocating a payment from a customer and using the main allocation option, when the button 'Post Allocation/s' was clicked, nothing would happen. No transactions would be allocated. This issue was introduced in v4.264. Fixed.
  
  

v4.264 11th September 2023

• A member of staff can now be set up with a sales commission that is automatically calculated on sales invoices (this does not include the Shop/Cafe Manager module). This commission is in addition to any sales commission set up on individual stock items.
  
  
• When viewing an HTML document, a new option has been added to email the HTML document, with the document as an attachment (rather than part of the email body, the option is still there to do that).
  
  
• Customer Statements: HTML layout has a new data field &TranHdrType3Char& that will display the transaction type using only 3 characters. The old data field, &TranHdrType& (which is still there), uses 13 characters.
  
  
• Stock Item Details: there is now a button that can copy 'Our Price' into each of the five discount price bands. This is only available if no Sales Discount code has been entered.
  
  
• Remittance Advices, print/PDF layout: a new data field has been added that will display the actual amount of the discount. Also, the data field that displayed the invoice amount after the discount would be 0.00 if there was no discount. Fixed.
  
  
• Supplier Invoices: if it was set to update stock, and if more than 200 lines in a single invoice contained stock items, it would only update the first 200 stock items. The rest would be ignored. Fixed.
  
  
• UK only: IF a VAT Return was submitted when in TEST mode, and the VAT Period End was then run, the VAT Return would be recorded as if it was a real submission. Preventing the VAT Period End from being undone (rolled back). Fixed.
  
  
• UK only: The enhancement in v4.262 for handling Postponed VAT may have introduced a bug, whereby Postponed VAT would effectively get doubled up (this did not affect the amount of VAT due). Fixed.
  
  

v4.262 10th August 2023

• Sales Prospecting Estimates and Sales Orders: when a cost is added for a stock item, the preferred supplier is automatically selected.
  
  
• Sales Prospecting Estimates and Sales Orders: when a cost is added for a stock item, if the button is clicked to find a supplier, it will list all suppliers listed for that particular stock item (a full list of suppliers is still available if required).
  
  
• Recurring sales invoices: the window can now be dragged wider t display the posting schedule.
  
  
• Email: it's now possible to add a 'signature' for each user, which will automatically be attached to any emails sent out by that user (excluding email shots). The signature will appear above any footer HTML in the email body.
  
  
• UK only, Postponed VAT scheme: any Postponed VAT is now shown in the purchase invoice itself (with the VAT table in th 'Descriptions' section). It can also be edited.
  
  
• UK only, Postponed VAT scheme: an adjustment for Postponed VAT can now be added tot eh VAT Return as part of the VAT period end option.
  
  
• UK only, there is now a separate option for Postponed VAT when setting up a VAT code. If you use Postponed VAT, you will need to edit the VAT code used for this purpose to set it to Postponed VAT. Previously, Postponed VAT was set up on a VAT code using the same option as UK Domestic Reverse charge (as they operate the same way). But it's not practical to continue to operate this way, and so Postponed VAT has it's own option.
  
  
• If UK VAT Returns are submitted, and GBP is not the ledgers base currency. The software will now record the exchange rate used at the time the VAT Return was submitted and the VAT period end processed.
  
  
• Payroll: payslips can now be emailed to each employee in one go, using the new button 'Email Payslips' in the 'Pay Input' window. Each payslip is attached to the email as a PDF file.
  
  
• Payroll: there is now an option to email an individual payslip when in the Payslip Input/Details option. Just click the 'Print Payslip' button, and 'Email PDF' is a new button that now appears as part of the selection.
  
  
• Payment Type codes: this has had an overhaul, and now handles credit card and PayPal payment methods better. The help text is also clearer on how to set up credit cards and PayPal.
  
  
• Remittance Advices, HTML layout: a new data field has been added that will display the amount of the discount.
  
  
• Sales Prospecting Estimates and Sales Orders: when the Sales Tax/VAT find button was clicked in the costs window, it would display Sales Analysis codes instead of tax codes. Fixed.
  
  
• Sales Prospecting Estimates and Sales Orders: when an Order/Job was created from an estimate, it would not copy over the user defined code or description fields. Fixed.
  
  

v4.261 7th July 2023

• Customer accounts now have a setting that will force the input of a Purchase Order reference for all invoices associated with the selected account (this does not apply when the software is running in Basic mode).
  
  
• Purchase Invoices when posted (and the window is being exited) can ask for the payment details. This action is determined in the Settings option, tab Miscellaneous 2. The default setting is to not ask for payment details.
  
  
• Stock/Inventory Control: When viewing the constituent items that make up a kit, the quantity of a constituent item can now be edited.
  
  
• Payroll: It is now possible to roll the payroll back one period. The option to do this is accessed from the 'Payroll Setup' button in the main Payroll option.
  
  
• When barcodes that can be printed in a document are scanned, the scan would pick up the check digit at the end of the code.
  
  
• When a Sales Order was created from an Estimate (in A/c Receivable or Sales Ledger), it would generate a message saying "Unable to open sales order file". The sales order file was actually already open, so the order was created, but of course the message shouldn't appear. Fixed.
  
  

v4.260 4th June 2023

• Stock item details: the stock Movements tab may now display the customer name or account code. If there is sufficient room in the list, which depends on which method of costing is being used and whether the stock item quantity is controlled. This only applied to the larger version of the stock item details window (which is automatically selected if there is sufficient space within the application window).
  
  
• Submission of UK HMRC VAT Returns from countries other than the UK where GBP is not the default ledger currency: the amounts for the VAT return will be automatically calculated in GBP (Great Britain Pounds). It requires GBP to be set up in the 'Currencies' option, and will use the exchange rate set up at the time the 'Full Report' is run.
  
  
• AutoManager, Service Counter: invoices raised (or previewed) for a job will now be in the currency of the customers account. All charges entered into the job should be in the ledger currency. If the customers account is not in the ledger currency, the charges will be automatically adjusted as necessary to accommodate the exchange rate.
  
  
• Most print/PDF documents can now have barcodes and QR codes added to the layout. As well as stock item barcodes, they can also include things like customer/supplier account code, transaction code, Purchase Order number, etc.
  
  
• QR codes can now be added to HTML document layouts.
  
  
• Sales Order Processing: quite a bit of work has been done to ensure the maintenance of the 'Sales Order' quantity and 'Reserved' quantities in stock item details is more reliable. Also, if delivery quantities are set to be updated from a Sales Invoice, any costs linked to charges will also have their delivery quantities updated (previously, this only happened if stock was booked out directly from the Sales Order/Job.
  
  
• Graphs: if zero is moved up the vertical axis of the graph to accommodate negative values, it will now display an additional line across the graph indicating where the zero line is.
  
  
• In the background Financial Summary, the current month was often missing from the right hand side of the main graph. Fixed.
  
  
• When copying a transaction in the 'Account Statement' option in General/Nominal Ledger, if the transaction contained Sales Tax/VAT, it may sometimes re-calculate the tax amount, and be 1p out, which it then adds or subtracts from the total. Most of the time it was OK, it only happened sometimes to some values. Fixed.
  
  
• Sales Order Processing: when stock items were booked out by entering a delivery into the charges to customer section, it would add a wrong selling price into the stock movement file. Fixed.
  
  
• Sales Order Processing: a Sales Invoice would update stock items even if the system was set to update stock items via deliveries to customer (from within the Sales Order/Job). Fixed.
  
  
• Email addresses that had just one letter for the domain name were flagged as invalid. But, while it's rare, there are some domains consisting of just one letter. Fixed.
  
  
• When editing company/organization details in a licensed copy of Adminsoft Accounts, the Sales Prospecting and Sales Order Processing modules would be enabled, even if they had been disabled in a previous edit (or when the company/organization was set up). Fixed.
  
  

v4.259 3rd May 2023

• Sales Order Processing: there are now numerous options for invoicing, and for adding costs to an invoice.
  
  
• Purchase Daybook report: there is now an option to print the transaction description instead of the supplier name.
  
  
• The graph displaying supplier purchases (invoices and credit notes), can now also display supplier payments.
  
  
• Full size graphs, that is graphs that take up most of the space in a regular sized window, can now be resized. If the window is dragged larger, the graph will expand with it.
  
  
• Stock/Inventory Control: in the stock item details window, an an SKU was typed in that could not be found, a find window automatically appears. If an item as not selected, but instead 'Cancel' was clicked, a stock item close to the already selected item could have it's description changed. If the 'Save' button was clicked in the stock item details window, other fields such as bin locations, retail prices, etc could also be changed. Fixed.
  
  
• Sales Order Processing: Sales Orders were not updating the 'Sales Order Processing' quantity in the stock item details. Fixed.
  
  
• Payroll, UK only: when an employee is not a director, the 'Accumulate NI' and 'Date employee became a director' input fields were still active, when they should have been greyed out. Fixed.
  
  
• Payroll, UK only: when an employee is appointed as a director, and a date of the appointment entered, it generates a tax week which is reported in the FPS. This tax week should have been cleared at the end of the tax year, but it wasn't. Fixed.
  
  

v4.258 16th April 2023

• The email shot option available to multiple sales invoices, customer statements, and employee P60s (UK only), can now display the individual attachment to each email to be sent.
  
  
• Payroll, UK only: when a payroll was processed, the FPS button was active (as it should be). But if the user exited the option without running the FPS and then went back in it again, the FPS button was no longer active. Fixed.
  
  

v4.257 12th April 2023

• Purchase Order Processing: when receiving stock, it is now possible to insert/delete lines (providing editing is enabled), the same as in the P/O create option. Various other minor upgrades have been carried out, including the ability to right click on most input fields to reveal further data, and the item receive history has been enhanced.
  
  
• Payroll, UK only: It's now a lot easier to email out P60s. When the option to email is selected, previously it would display an email window for each employee, which was not practical if you had more than a handful of employees. Now it uses an email shot facility, so you only need to enter any email text once, and click the Send button once.
  
  
• Stock item details now has a 'Record Count' button to record the date when the quantity in stock for that item was counted. This is to make it easy to record the date when items are counted in between regular stock checks. If the the quantity needs adjusting, use the 'Adjust Stock' button as usual, which can also record the count date.
  
  
• Payroll: if a payroll got to the end of the tax year, and wasn't processed again, and it's employee's were moved onto another payroll, the figures for the last pay period would vanish (the data was still there, just not visible). Fixed.
  
  
• General/Nominal Ledger: bank/cash statement, in the wider version of the option (which is always automatically displayed if Adminsoft Accounts has the screen space), the reconciled and un-reconciled buttons stopped working (almost certainly due to modifications in v4.256). Fixed.
  
  

v4.256 5th April 2023

• Email Membership/Multiple Invoices: can now have it's own footer (email template) set up. They now also include any default attachments that go out with PDF sales invoices. Also, the invoice PDF file attached is now named "Invoice "+invoice number.PDF, instead of a random number.
  
  
• Most of the various import data file options can now import data directly out of spreadsheet files: xls, xlsx, and ods, as well as the usual CSV, TAB and TXT files.
  
  
• AutoManager: in the customer account details, where vehicles/equipment is listed, the order of the list can now be changed by clicking on one of the column headers. It can also sort in ascending or descending order.
  
  
• Stock/Inventory Control, Stock Take Adjustments: the date of the stock take will be recorded when an item is adjusted, and can still be recorded if no adjustment required. Also, the date a stock item was last counted now appears in the stock item details, and clicking on it allows yo to enter a new date.
  
  
• Customer statements: the option to generate statements is now far more powerful. A list of customers is now visible, and from this list you can select only those you wish to send statements too. Also, there are now three options for sending statements, one of which is via a bulk email facility, where each statement can be sent to the customer as a PDF file, HTML file, or as HTML embedded within the body of the email. Similar to the Membership/Multiple Invoices option. Note, the old option for producing statements is still there, and is available as an alternative from within the new statements option.
  
  
• The 'Account Statement' option in General/Nominal Ledger has a 'Copy' button (if there is enough screen space available to the application). This would copy any General/Nominal Ledger transaction. But if the transaction was created by a transaction in another ledger or module, that original transaction would not be copied. This was sometimes a cause of some confusion, and so now transactions generated from another ledger or module can not be copied. The exceptions are payments and refunds for customers/suppliers.
  
  
• Sales Prospecting and Sales Order Processing: the two user defined fields can now be set for input to be mandatory, if required. The options to do this are in the Settings option.
  
  
• Sales Prospecting and Sales Order Processing: the Adminsoft Accounts user security profile can be set up to allow or not allow the editing of the sales representative code in prospect details, estimate details and order/job details. This doe not affect the creation of a new record, only the editing of an existing one.
  
  
• Sales Prospecting, Imported Data Lists: a new list can now be created that contains records extracted from an existing list. This makes it easy to setup sub-lists, that contain particular data.
  
  
• There is now an option in Setup -> System that will list any additional copies of Adminsoft Accounts that may be on the PC.
  
  
• Payroll, United Kingdom only: if/when the user edits the calculated employee and employer NI amounts due for the current period, if the employee is a director, and the input field "Accumulate NI" is set to 'Y', then the NI amount can now be set to a negative figure. Provided it does not make the NI paid to date a negative figure (under HMRC rules, that can never be a negative figure).
  
  
• Email Membership/Multiple Invoices: the 'Add Customer' button would allow the user to add a customer account that was already in the list of accounts to be invoiced. Fixed.
  
  
• Stock/Inventory Control, Stock Take Adjustments: if the 'Load Data' button was clicked without entering a bin location range or anything into the filters, the stock list would not display. Fixed.
  
  

v4.255 1st March 2023

• There is a new option for creating sales invoices called 'Membership/Multiple Invoices' which allows you to create one invoice for a range of customers (user selectable), and print them or email them out in one go (as an email shot). Could be ideal for things like club membership fees, or things like monthly/quarterly charges for service/maintenance cover, etc.
  
  
• Sales Invoices: when entering an item that is not in the stock database, if can now be added by right clicking into the 'Stock Code or Description of Item/Service' input line. In a similar way that stock items can be added to the database from purchase invoices.
  
  
• Sales Invoices, 'Select Images to Print': images can now be dragged and dropped straight into that section, if required. The other options for adding images are all still there.
  
  
• Autocomplete (where the software makes suggestions to help complete the input when text is typed in) has now been extended to include the 'Description' of the invoice/credit note (not the lines, which already have the autocomplete available, but the actual document description). If required, this needs to enabled via the Adminsoft Accounts user maintenance option (Appearance -> Setup Input Field Autocomplete)
  
  
• Print/PDF layouts: the message that can appear on print/PDF documents for sales invoices/credit notes, is now also available to advice notes, proforma invoices and estimates.
  
  
• AutoManager, Service Counter: a Job Card can now be printed regardless of whether any tasks have been entered.
  
  
• United Kingdom only, payroll: If the user select 'Next Period' in the 'Payroll' option, and click the date find button to select the next pay period end date, the payroll would not be brought forward to the next date. Fixed. If the date wasn't changed, or was manually edited, it would work fine.
  
  
• Supplier account details: the "Email Contact" button sometimes didn't work. Also, after selecting an item from any of the lists in the account details, if another supplier account was then selected, many buttons associated with those lists would remain enabled, even though no items/lines had been selected for that account. Fixed
  
  
• United Kingdom only, payroll: the accumulated NI feature enabled in the last version, v4.254, did not calculate the NI correctly. It worked it out pro-rata as the tax year progressed (much like tax), when in fact it should have applied the annual NI bands from the first day of the new tax year onwards. Fixed.
  
  
• When Adminsoft Accounts is running as Freeware, if the PC goes to sleep with the application still running, when if it's not started again until the following day, it could take a long time before the background can be changed. Fixed.
  
  
• When outputting a list, if the 'Print' button was selected, it wouldn't actually print. Fixed.
  
  
• Recurring sales invoices didn't always calculate the payment date correctly (though tended to work properly if the invoice tax date was edited). Fixed.
  
  

v4.254 8th February 2023

• Many lists, particularly those concerned with stock, no longer have any limit on the number of transactions or items listed.
  
  
• When a transaction is selected in customer or supplier details, and a payment entered. If a Sales Tax/VAT Cash Accounting scheme is in use, the allocation date will be the date of the payment (or refund or bounced payment). This date is critical, as it dictates which Sales Tax/VAT period the transaction and tax is reported in. If not using a Cash Accounting scheme, the allocation date will be 'to days' date.
  
  
• There is now an option to export items entered into sales invoices. The option is in the 'Reports' section of the menu. it allows a wide selection of data fields to be output to a CSV file or into a spreadsheet.
  
  
• Stock Control/Inventory: has a new option in the Setup menu that allows wholesale changes to be made to the stock codes/SKUs.
  
  
• Stock Control/Inventory: when a stock item is superseded, there is usually an option to merge the data of the superseded item to the item it's being superseded to. This is now enabled by default (previous it was disabled by default). The default can be changed in Settings.
  
  
• Stock Control/Inventory: stock item records now log certain changes to the stock item data. Some data fields should very rarely be changed (for example, the SKU or the sales tax/VAT code), and so any changes to these fields are now recorded.
  
  
• There are now three layouts available for customer receipts. These are selected in the A/c Receivable (Sales Ledger) Setup menu ("Miscellaneous 1" tab).
  
  
• Sales Prospecting, an export data option has been added to imported data lists.
  
  
• Asset Register: When an asset is sold, depreciation will now be calculated up to the period or date when the item was sold. Previously, it stopped calculating depreciation as soon as a sold date was entered in to the asset record.
  
  
• United Kingdom only: When submitting a VAT Return, there is now a 'Verbose' option. When this is clicked, the process displayed will show a lot more information. This can be useful if the VAT submission failed.
  
  
• United Kingdom only, payroll: Now allows NI to be calculated on an accumulative basis for directors.
  
  
• Sales Invoices and Delivery Notes (from Account Receivable/Sales Ledger) can now print the total number if items in the invoice. The Sales Analysis code for the item must be for 'goods' in order to get counted.
  
  
• Sales Invoices can now print analysis figures for the total goods, total labour and total service amounts, based on the Sales Analysis code of each items. The value's exclude any Sales Tax/VAT and any whole invoice discount. These analysis figures are currently only available in the HTML document layout.
  
  
• In the options for posting multiple receipts and payments, when the transaction is posted, there is now a 'New' button that allows immediate entry of the next transaction. Without having to re-select the option.
  
  
• Printing stock item barcodes: whatever was being printed would sometimes appear in the window used to control printing/output of the barcodes, overwriting the input fields and buttons in the window. Fixed.
  
  
• Asset Register: If there was only one account period for the whole financial year, and the depreciation calculation was set to calculate by date (which it has to if there's only one account period), it would not calculate depreciation in the first year the asset was purchased, though would catch up in the following year. Fixed.
  
  
• United Kingdom only: when a VAT Period has been processed but a VAT Return not submitted to HMRC, it can still be submitted from the 'Old Value Added Tax Period End Reports' option. But, this didn't always work. Fixed.
  
  
• When editing a sales invoice with the accounts system in 'Basic' mode, the invoice could end up as an 'unknown' transaction. Making it very difficult then to do anything with it. Fixed.
  
  
• Payroll: when a payroll was brought forward to the next tax year, if it didn't start at period 1, the year to date figures for each employee on the payroll did not get cleared down. Fixed.
  
  
• United Kingdom only, payroll: when a payroll was set to be 'Irregular', the first pay slip was fine, but subsequent pay slips may not work out tax or NI correctly. Fixed.
  
  
• Printing sales invoices to HTML or PDF would sometimes not work. Either the wrong details would appear, or in the case of a PDF, sometimes the file would not be created properly. This bug was probably introduced in v4.252. Fixed.
  
  

v4.252 4th January 2023

• Inventory/Stock Control: new list option 'Stock by Supplier Part'. This will list all stock items in the supplier/manufacturer part code order. Only items with a supplier/manufacturer part code will be listed.
  
  
• There is a new option in Inventory/Stock Control: Stock Take Adjustments. This will list stock items in the same way as the Stock Take report. But in this option, you can select an item and set the quantity in stock to whatever figure has been counted during the stock take.
  
  
• There is now an option in Stock Control/Inventory Settings, that will allow a barcode to be scanned in to most places (but not all) where it's expecting a Stock Code/SKU.
  
  
• Barcodes can now be printed. The option is available in several lists that contain stock items, P/Os, stock received/returned, purchase invoices, and individual stock items ('Edit Barcode' button). You will need to setup the barcode label sizes and type of barcode you wish to use in the Stock Control/Inventory setup option.
  
  
• Reports, lists and documents (such as invoices, statements, etc) can now have a default location setup for when they are output to a file, such as PDF, HTML, CSV or ASCII Text. Specific document types can have their own default location, so invoices can be saved into one folder, statements in another, and so on.
  
  
• Advance payments: there is now an option in General Ledger (Nominal Ledger) Settings to allow a VAT/Sales Tax amount to be entered into both customer and supplier (when using VAT Cash Accounting) payments transactions. This means advance payments can be accounted for in the VAT/Sales Tax period end (if the payment remains unallocated, ie. it still has a balance outstanding). The amount of VAT/Sales can can be automatically calculated based on the default VAT/Sales Tax code provided in the customer or supplier account (if there is a code). The amount can be edited at any time.
  
  
• Aseet Register: the purchase price of an asset now appears in the list, along with the depreciation method and percentage (or years if sum of digits). The list is now width adjustable.
  
  
• When a customer or supplier transaction that is in dispute is edited, the original (now deleted) transaction is still attached to the dispute, but the newly edited transaction is not. The edited transaction is no longer listed as being in dispute. This has now been changed, so the edited transaction will list as being in dispute, and in the dispute details, both the deleted (ie. the transaction before it was edited) and edited transaction will be listed.
  
  
• VAT/Sales Tax Cash Accounting Scheme: if a tax/VAT Period End is rolled back more than one tax/VAT period, any transactions that were processed as part of a tax/VAT Period End more than once may get rolled back. Fixed.
  
  
• When allocating a customer or supplier payment, if a transaction that was being allocated to was locked by another window (or another user if on a network), the payment may not be allocated properly. Fixed.
  
  
• Sales Order Processing: when entering details of a delivery, the delivery note print button ignored the output selected, and always displayed the delivery note on screen. Fixed.
  
  

v4.251 4th December 2022

• When entering a supplier invoice or credit note, if 'Allow stock selection' is selected, you can now right click into the 'Description of item/service' input field to create a new stock item based on any information on that line (assuming the item is not not already a stock item).
  
  
• General Ledger/Nominal Ledger: in account details, there is a new button that will display a graph of the account balance over time. This is particularly useful when analysing cash/bank accounts and sales accounts.
  
  
• Email: the 3rd party software Chilkat has been updated to the latest version (9.5.0.92). This is due to the older version no longer working with some SMTP servers. Note: Chilkat is now the preferred method of sending email, and when setting up to send email directly from Adminsoft Accounts, please select Chilkat (it should be selected by default anyway).
  
  
• Account Receivable ledger (Sales Ledger), Import Transactions option: 'payment due date' added as a new import data field.
  
  
• Delivery Notes from Account Receivable ledger (Sales Ledger) can now include stock item bin locations. Either layout type, print/PDF or HTML can be used. Also, the stock item unit and solvent content can also now be added to the HTML delivery note layout.
  
  
• United Kingdom only: if another tax type was set up along side VAT, the VAT system would not work correctly. The ability to set up another tax type has now been removed for users in the UK.
  
  
• Sales Order Processing: the 'Locate Order by Order Number' option may locate a deleted order/job. It can then display some basic details. Note: if/when you re-index the database, if the option 'Remove deleted accounts and other records' is selected, it will remove any deleted orders/jobs.
  
  
• The 'Vehicle Mileage' option: you can now set a particular driver as the default driver, which means their record will be automatically selected when the 'Vehicle Mileage' option is selected. Alternative drivers can still be selected.
  
  
• Customer invoices and credit notes in HTML format did not handle images or their descriptions well. Fixed.
  
  
• Customer credit notes when output to HTML would fail, displaying a message "No Unknown? HTML layout found?". Fixed.
  
  
• Sales Prospecting, Imported Data Lists: if when importing a list the 'Do not include records with duplicated email addresses' was selected, all the records it imported were blank. Fixed.
  
  
• Sales Order Processing: when a cost item in an order/job was deleted, if it was a stock a stock item and some stock had been reserved, it did not automatically release the reserved stock. Fixed.
  
  
• Sales Order Processing: when cost items were stock items and a sales invoice was raised, and stock was set to be updated from the invoice, the invoice did not always pick up the correct cost items. Fixed.
  
  
• Attachment of files to documents being emailed: the option in the Setup -> Miscellaneous option to select files that would be automatically attached to certain documents allowed the user to add files, but if/when the files were edited, the edit did
  
  
not work. So once added, the files could not be changed. Fixed.


• United Kingdom only, Payroll: it was no longer possible to edit the tax and NI figures for an employee's payslip. Fixed.
  
  
• The 'To' and 'From' dates for various lists that can be set for Account Receivable ledger (Sales Ledger), Sales Prospecting lists, and Sales Order Processing lists, did not always work correctly. Fixed.
  
  

v4.249 2nd November 2022

• Sales Daybook Report: the user can now select a number of extra transaction data items to print.
  
  
• Sales Invoices: two extra settings have been added to assist when entering invoices, warn the user if the item cost is zero, or below zero, and warn user if a cost could not be found using the selected cost method (which means the cost may not be correct, this can happen when there is no stock). By default, bth these settings are disabled, and so to use them you need to enable them in the Settings option.
  
  
• Sales Invoices: there is now a setting that will allow the invoice to be allocated to a payment straight after posting. If the 'Print & Post' button in the invoice is selected, the allocation takes place before the invoice is printed, allowing any 'PAID' type data fields in the invoice layout to be printed.
  
  
• General Stock Report: the last cost price (LAST) can now be selected in th list of possible output fields.
  
  
• New data field added into the Customer Statement HTML layout. This will display the extra description in a transaction, or if it does not contain any text, it will use the transactions regular description.
  
  
• A new report has been added to Inventory/Stock Control. Stock Item Cost Analysis, which will list the FIFO, LIFO, AVCO, LIST and LAST costs for each stock item.
  
  
• United Kingdom, Payroll: new NI rates, plus directors now have their own NI table due to different NI rates and a couple of different thresholds.
  
  
• The toolbar now includes some options for Sales Prospecting and Sales Order Processing.
  
  
• Importing POS Data: the new input field for sales invoices, 'extra description' now added to the list of available data fields for import.
  
  
• When looking at the details of a stock movement record, there is a new button 'Source of Cost' that will display the cost method/s used to obtain the stock item cost. Note: this will only work for any stock movements generated after installing v4.249.
  
  
• Shop/Cafe Manager: when making a sale quanties can now be entered to two decimal places. This needs to be enabled in the Settings option.
  
  
• When a stock movement record is deleted or edited (as a result of editing a sales or purchase invoice), a history is now maintained of the data prior to the delete/edit. An edit history can be viewed from the stock movement details option, and from the 'Movement History' button in stock item details. From that option, deleted stock movement records can be recovered.
  
  
• United Kingdom, VAT Cash Accounting Scheme now has an option to automatically report and process payments made/received in advance in the VAT Period End. It will be enabled in new installations, but in existing installations it will need to be enabled in the Nominal Ledger Settings option.
  
  
• Purchase Invoices: the small version of the invoice had a tabbing issue. In that when an invoice was entered from new, the cursor would go into the 'Tax Dat' input field, but from there jump inot the 'Description' input field, instead of the next input field down which is 'Suppliers Ref'. Fixed.
  
  
• The autocomplete facility (that makes suggestions as users type into an input field) did not work for about half of the possible input fields that can use it. Fixed. (this facility needs to be enabled, the option is 'Setup Input Field Autocomplete' in the Adminsoft Accounts user details)
  
  
• In the Money Paid Out option, if 'Add Account to List' was selected, when an account in the the list was clicked, a 'Y' did not appear next to it. Which has lead to some confusion. Fixed.
  
  
• United Kingdom only: Payroll, submitting an NI Verification would fail if the Corporation Tax Reference in RTI settings actually contained a tax reference. It would also always fail in TEST mode. Fixed.
  
  
• AutoManager, PartsCounter: if the mouse cursor ran over the column headers above the list of stock items, some options on the page may select the wrong stock item. Fixed.
  
  
• Customer transaction: Refund, when edited, if the amount of the refund was changed, it saved the original amount and not the new value. Fixed.
  
  
• Sales Proforma Invoices, Advice Notes, and Estimates (created from customer account) when being created, the 'Print Only' button would not output to all available options (including Excel and NotePad). Fixed.
  
  
• When entering a Sales Invoice, if the system is set to not allow a stock item to be sold if there is insufficient quantity in stock, if such an item was entered, the cursor could get stuck in the Sales Analysis and Sales Tax/VAT code input fields - forcing the user to enter a value in order to get back to the find button or description of item input field. Fixed.
  
  
• The 'Map' button to display the location of a prospect, customer or supplier stopped working for the USA and some other countries. This has now been fixed, sort of. United States, Canada and United Kingdom all use Google Maps (if there's a postcode/ZIP code, else OpenStreetMap wil be used), all other countries use OpenStreeMap. I'm afraid not all countries are covered.
  
  
• Sales Order Processing: the Orders by Employee Analysis option, when the list was printed, the monthly column totals would all be the same as the first column. Fixed.
  
  

v4.247 13th September 2022

• Sales Invoices, Proformas, Advice Notes, and Estimates (from the customer account): when entering text into the 'Stock Code or Description' input column, the software can now display a list of stock items, based on what has been typed in. An item can be selected, saving time having to enter the whole stock code. To use this facility, it needs to be enabled: Setup -> A/c Receivable (or Sales Ledger) -> Settings -> Miscellaneous2
  
  
• Sales Invoices, Proformas and Estimates (from the customer account) can now have images selected for printing (in both print/PDF and HTML type documents, the image fields must be in the layout). The images can come from stock items selected in the invoice, or from images that have been scanned in, or otherwise acquired.
  
  
• Stock Control/Inventory: The Price List report can now filter stock items by price.
  
  
• The 'Money Received' and 'Money Paid Out' options (for single accounts), now have a 'Post' button. This allows a transaction to be posted, and the window cleared ready for another one.
  
  
• Sales Prospecting: stock item images can now be selected for printing in estimates (both single and multi product).
  
  
• An option has been added into the 'Common / Year End Transactions' option in the General Ledger (Nominal Ledger) to enter the figures generated by a 3rd party payroll. Unless you're a bookkeeping expert, entering the payroll figures can be difficult, this new option makes it a lot easier.
  
  
• A Sales Order Processing order/job number can now be added to a new Sales Invoice or Credit Note when not being raised from the order/job itself. It can also be added or edited when a sales Invoice or Credit Note is being edited.
  
  
• YouTube, TikTok, Instagram, SnapChat and Reddit have been added to the Alternative Communication list.
  
  
• AutoManager, Parts Counter: the space for bin locations was only displaying up to about seven and a half characters. This has been increased to show the full ten characters.
  
  
• The 'Description' input field in the payment and receipt options in General Ledger (Nominal Ledger), now uses autocomplete. This is a facility that displays previously entered text as the user types, allowing her/him to select some previously entered text (by double clicking on it in the list).
  
  
• United Kingdom only: If a VAT period end is processed without submitting a VAT Return, it is now possible to submit the VAT Return from the option 'Old Value Added Tax Period End Reports' located in the 'Reports' section of the Nominal Ledger drop down menu.
  
  
• When entering purchase transactions using the 'Invoice Receipt' option in the supplier account, if a payment was included, it would be allocated using the date the transaction was entered. It now defaults to using the tax date of the transaction (important to those using a Sales Tax/VAT Cash Accounting scheme). There is the option to use 'to days' date instead, if required.
  
  
• It is now possible to create recurring reminders, for both general reminders and account specific.
  
  
• General Ledger/Nominal Ledger: when creating a new account, if 8 characters were entered for the new account code, or you entered less characters and tabbed or pressed the Enter key to move into the next field, when moving the mouse cursor to select the account type, a
  
  
small window would appear asking you to enter the account type. Fixed.
• Statement of Financial Position (Balance Sheet): if some department codes started with a number (which should be perfectly fine), the input field for the department on the left hand side of the window would not always work properly. Sometimes selecting a random department. Fixed.
  
  
• Editing print/PDF document layouts: when loading an Estimate for Sales Prospecting, any image fields could be lost, in that they would stop working unless data objects were replaced. Fixed.
  
  
• Editing print/PDF document layouts: some data objects when dragged onto the layout would appear off to the left hand side of where the mouse cursor stopped, or may not appear at all as they were outside the boundary of the layout. Fixed.
  
  
• Sales Order Processing: only one user could view a sales Order/Job at any one time. If a second user attempted to access the same Order/Job, it would say it was locked and exit the window. Fixed.
  
  

v4.246 3rd August 2022

• Viewing HTML documents now offers some more options, including controlling the print settings. This will allow you to remove the header and footer information that currently gets printed on each page. It also allows you to view in your default web browser and to print from your default web browser.
  
  
• When a customer account status is set to 'Stopped', this should prevent some transactions such an invoices from being raised (subject to settings), but in practice it could be circumvented. Security has now been tightened up to prevent this.
  
  
• The Debtors Control option and Aged Debtors Summary report both now have an option to produce an aged analysis based on the payment due date.
  
  
• Most lists off the main menu in Sales Prospecting, Sales Order Processing, Account Receivable (Sales Ledger), Account Payable (Purchase Ledger), and Stock Control/Inventory can now have default 'From' and 'To' dates set up in their respective Settings options.
  
  
• In the employee details, the input field 'sex' now includes 'none binary' in some countries (Argentina, Australia, India, South Africa). If you require none binary as an option, but it is not available, you can make it available by changing a setting in the country/region details. To do this, select 'Setup' on the top menu bar, go down to 'System', and select the option 'Setup country/region data'.
  
  
• General Ledger (Nominal Ledger) now has a General Import option. This can import journals via a CVS file using file/field definitions that can be saved.
  
  
• Most windows that list data, allow you to run a report, or just have perhaps one active input field, can now be closed by pressing the Escape key on your keyboard.
  
  
• In the HTML layout for customer statements, there is a new data field &CustomerNotOdue& that will display the total value of transactions that are current, but not overdue.
  
  
• Sales Invoices (when system is in 'Level 2', the default) can now have an extra description entered (just below 'Notes' in the 'Details' section). This can appear in documents, but HTML only at this time.
  
  
• When using the option in the 'Reports' menu to output customer statements. If the statements were output to 'HTML (View)', each window that appeared for each customer would only show the first statement. Fixed.
  
  
• When importing POS data into Accounts Receivable (Sales Ledger), if the user specified a string field delimiter, the last record in the import file would be ignored. This was a known issue, as explained in the Help text for that option. The issue is now fixed
  
  
• When the font size within Adminsoft Accounts was increased above the standard size, some windows that would automatically resize when a button or arrow is clicked, did not resize properly. Fixed. Also, the resizing of windows has been improved generally.
  
  

v4.245 15th July 2022

• The 'Cash / Bank Accounts' option that lists each cash/bank account along with the balances, now also lists the last date a transaction was posted to the account, and the balance of any remittance advices due to be paid from each account.
  
  
• Purchase Order Processing: When creating a new P/O, if 'Print Preview' is selected, when the P/O is printed, it will use the P/O reference number (if the option to generate a new P/O number when selecting the create P/O option has been enabled). This allows a user to continually refine the items on a P/O, perhaps sending their supplier copies of the P/O, until it has the required items on it. Then it can be placed 'On Order'.
  
  
• Creditors Control option (including the option to print the Creditors Control), now has an option to only display balances that are less than a given number of days old (stipulated by the user).
  
  
• Sales Prospecting and Sales Order Processing can now handle overall discounts on estimates and orders/jobs.
  
  
• Sales Order Processing now handles the reserving of stock items. This can be set to automatic, where every stock item (for which the quantity is controlled) has some stock reserved, or manual, where the user has to select certain items they wish to reserve.
  
  
• Import Customers, Suppliers & Transactions: if sales transactions are imported without any reference, then 'Imported' is written into the reference field. If purchase transactions are imported without any reference, then 'Import' plus the record number is written into the reference field.
  
  
• Import Customers, Suppliers & Transactions: if an import file was selected and the filename was in lowercase, the software may display a message saying the file was the wrong type. Fixed.
  
  
• Import Customers, Suppliers & Transactions: importing CSV files in the 'Sales Transactions' or 'Purchase Transactions' sections, would not allow character fields to be delimited with quote marks. Fixed.
  
  
• Import Customers, Suppliers & Transactions: when importing transactions, if the user was required to select a Payment Type Code, the import would fail. Fixed.
  
  
• Stock item details: in the 'Purchases' section, if the option 'List in Cost Each order' was selected, it was no longer possible to use the 'Supplier Details' or 'Original Transaction' buttons. Fixed.
  
  

v4.242 7th June 2022

• Payroll: When setting up a new payroll, it was possible to create the first pay period with no period end date. This could cause problems later on, especially a the tax ear end. Fixed. Although the fix is not retrospective, any payroll with no period end date needs a period end date entering.
  
  
• Sales Order Processing: whether the 'Book Out of Stock' and 'Items Delivered to Customer' or a sales invoice book items out of stock is now selectable in settings only. This is to avoid booking stock out twice.
  
  
• Sales Order Processing: options 'Book Out of Stock' and 'Items Delivered to Customer' - will now book out items in both the charges and costs section. Provided the items are linked. Charges and cost items can be linked manually in the charges or cost items details, they are also linked automatically when one of the 'Copy cost ..' options is used. Any links created in an estimate get carried over to an order/job.
  
  
• Sales Order Processing: the print/PDF Sales Order Confirmation layout now has a data field for printing the customers Purchase Order reference.
  
  
• General/Nominal Ledger: in the "Enter Transaction / Journals" option it was possible to enter a debit or credit amount into a line in which the account code was invalid, and would then allow the transaction to be posted. Fixed.
  
  
• Sales Order Processing: Sales Invoice doesn't show the SKU, only the stock item description. Fixed.
  
  
• Sales Order Processing: options 'Book Out of Stock' and 'Items Delivered to Customer' - the output option shown for the Delivery Note is 'View (PDF)', but it would sometimes use 'View (Text)' instead. Fixed.
  
  
• Sales Order Processing: options 'Book Out of Stock' and 'Items Delivered to Customer' - the mouse wheel scrolling didn't work, also input fields in the 'Delivered' or 'Received' columns were active on lines where there were no items. Fixed.
  
  
• In the "Database - Fix" option, the option to fix stock/inventory would sometimes get into a loop and not complete the operation. The only way to get out was to end the application using Windows Task Manager. Fixed.
  
  
• In the "Database - Fix" option, the "Fix P/O related Stock Data" button didn't do anything. Fixed.
  
  

v4.241 18th May 2022

• Cash/bank statement report: there is now an option to print a wide and extra wide version. The software will ask the question when the report button is clicked.
  
  
• United Kingdom only - Payroll: When sending an EPS with a figure for CIS deductions suffered. The EPS would be rejected. Fixed. A valid Corporation Tax number must be provided in the payroll RTI settings.
  
  
• United Kingdom only - VAT Period End: the option 'VAT due on tax date' available in VAT code details when using the VAT Cash Accounting scheme, did not work properly if a payment was allocated to the Invoice or Credit Note. Fixed.
  
  

v4.240 4th May 2022

• The 'Print List' button in many lists now has the option to output the list into Microsoft Excel or OpenOffice Calc.
  
  
• Customer statements: some new data fields and commands have been added to the HTML layouts which allow for the production of more sophisticated statements.
  
  
• Sales Prospecting and Sales Order Processing: the next estimate and sales order/job numbers can now be edited.
  
  
• Sales Order Processing: invoices (and credit notes) can be allocated to an order/job via the 'Orders/Jobs Not Invoiced' option in the 'Lists' section of the Sales Order Processing drop down menu.
  
  
• Purchase Invoices: When adding items to an invoice form a P/O, you can now opt to use either the quantity received or the quantity on order.
  
  
• The Trading Report now has extra options for printing a wide version (to handle larger numbers) and for printing decimal places.
  
  
• Purchase Invoices: When adding items to an invoice from a P/O, if an item was edited, the software could forget it came from a P/O (even though the P/O reference would still be displayed on the right hand side) and update the stock if the 'Allow stock update' setting was ticked (items from a P/O should never update stock from an invoice). Fixed.
  
  
• When using any of the 'Money Received' or 'Money Paid Out' options, if the 'List accounts in description order' setting was changed part way through entering the transaction, amounts could get posted to the wrong bank account. Fixed.
  
  
• When undoing a Sales TAX/VAT period end, the purchase transactions were not fully undone. This meant when the Sales Tax/VAT period end was run again, the purchase transactions would double up. Fixed.
  
  
• Sales Prospecting: estimates for multiple products/quantities would not take the costs from stock control when estimating stock items. Fixed.
  
  
• Sales Prospecting: estimates for multiple products/quantities, when the find button was clicked for the Sales Analysis codes, it listed Purchase Analysis codes. Fixed.
  
  
• Sales Order Processing: the PDF/print version of the Order Confirmation would not print the customer account details. Fixed.
  
  
• Sales Order Processing: the 'order not invoiced' list did not add up the list of invoice values correctly, it only showed the value of the last invoice. Fixed.
  
  
• Sales Order Processing: when booking items out, the delivery note would not pickup the correct address if there was no prospect associated with the order/job. Fixed.
  
  

v4.239 7th April 2022

• New modules: Sales Prospecting and Sales Order Processing are now available. They will be automatically enabled when you update the software. If required, they can be disabled in the company/organization details window (from the Adminsoft Accounts start up window). There are free user guides available to download from the web site. Sorry, but those using the software for free will not be able to access these new modules.
  
  
• There is a new option 'Common / Year End Transactions' that makes it much easier to post into a retained profit account, and handle things like dividends and payment of Corporation Tax.
  
  
• The Daybook reports for both sales and purchases, and the Audit Trail report in the General (Nominal) Ledger now have an option to print only transactions that do not have a department code.
  
  
• The Sales Commission report now only prints figures for staff where they have actually sold something during the specified period. Previously, it listed all staff members, whether they had sold anything or not.
  
  
• In the option to transfer funds from one bank/cash account to another, you can now stipulate a department.
  
  
• Stock/Inventory Control, when entering a supplier record for a stock item, it would allow a regular SKU to be entered as the suppliers part code even if that SKU was for another stock item. It now checks to make sure the suppliers part code is unique, or at least the same as the SKU the supplier record is associated with.
  
  
• United Kingdom only: Payroll would not print P60s. The list of payrolls to select just contained the characters ".f.". So a payroll couldn't be selected. Fixed.
  
  
• A message "Unable to open ... " would appear when entering a single receipt or payment directly into the Nominal/General when it was set to mark the new transaction as already reconciled. Fixed.
  
  
• Batched payments for both customers and suppliers, if a batch was saved, when it was brought back to continue working on it, the 'Post Batch' button was greyed out. At least until another payment was added. Fixed.
  
  
• The option to report the transactions and figures for old Sales Tax/VAT period ends stopped working. Fixed.
  
  
• Trial Balance by Period list, the 'List Transactions' button did not work. Often not listing any transactions. Fixed.
  
  

v4.238 4th March 2022

• Customer accounts can now have their own default document layouts set up, which will override the default layouts set up for the company/organization. The option is at the bottom of the list of current transactions in the customer account details, on the far right.
  
  
• Cash/Bank Statement, a new button 'Copy' has been added. This allows you to replicate any transaction being displayed. You can edit the details prior to posting. Should be very useful for posting repetitive things like bank charges, bank interest, etc.
  
  
• When sending email, there is now an option to setup and select frequently used email addresses. When sending an individual email, RIGHT click on the button to the right hand side of the email address input fields. When sending bulk email, there is a separate button.
  
  
• When entering a purchase invoice, if a P/O is selected using the 'Invoice P/O' button, as well as all the P/O items received, some details from the P/O such as delivery date, department, etc. will now be also copied over to the invoice.
  
  
• Shop/Cafe Manager and AutoManager: where items on a receipt use different Sales Tax/VAT codes, the Sales Tax/VAT rate will be identified for each item.
  
  
• There is now an archive facility in the user maintenance option, similar to that for customer and supplier accounts. This allows you to set aside users that will no longer have access to the system, without actually deleting them (so their details will still available when referenced by account records or transactions).
  
  
• Email Engine: there is now a button in the 'Monitor/Control Email Shot Engine' option (Setup -> Miscellaneous) to clear out old email jobs.
  
  
• Creating Purchase Orders: you can now set up a default output option for the 'Print Order' button in the Purchase Order Processing settings menu.
  
  
• HTML document layouts: there is now a field for adding the current year (&TheYearNow&), and also a facility to add up to five user defined strings to a layout (&UserDefString1& to &UserDefString5&). The strings can contain anything, including HTML and even JavaScript. They're useful if you need to add something into a number of HTML documents that may change occasionally. Saves you having to edit every document each time there's a change.
  
  
• When entering sales invoices, you will now find two little buttons at the top of the 'Stock Code or Description of Item/Service' column that allow you to increase or decrease the font size in that column (only available in advanced mode). Useful when entering a long description on one line. Note: this does not affect the font size in the invoice is output (that depends entirely on the print/PDF or HTML layout).
  
  
• UK only: the payroll is now ready for tax year 2022/23. Note: at this time, Adminsoft Accounts will not be supporting the new NI letters F, I, S and L, which are for use within a Freeport. It also does not support the new NI letter V.
  
  
• Customer account details, in the wider version of the window, when the 'Save' button was clicked, the output selection part of the 'Statement' button was greyed out. Fixed.
  
  
• The 'List Ledger Events' option in the 'General' menu stopped displaying events. Fixed.
  
  
• Purchase Order Processing: the 'Use last cost if lower then list' option in settings had stopped working. Fixed.
  
  
• Supplier Credit Notes: When clicking into the 'Amount' column to get the software to work out the unit cost (for the 'Each' column), it would generate a negative unit cost. Fixed.
  
  
• Purchase Orders: in the 'Purchase Order Received' option, if the 'Date received' input field was edited, or even if you just cursored through it, a blue 'Label28' would appear at the side of it. Fixed.
  
  
• Some times when the 'Help' button is clicked, the Help window could popup behind the window it was called from. In some cases this caused the application to freeze. Usually it happened when the 'Help' button was clicked from one of the 'find' options. Fixed.
  
  
• UK Only: when outputting the VAT Period End report to a spreadsheet, the total VAT figure for the column headed 'other' (usually for adjustments, early settlement, etc) was put into the VAT total for Credit Notes column (this had no effect on the figures in the VAT return). Fixed.
  
  

v4.237 4th January 2022

• When the Cash Accounting Scheme is used for working out the amount of sales tax/VAT due, you can now set up a tax/VAT code and set an option 'VAT due on tax date'. When this is set, any items sold or purchased using the tax/VAT code will be reported in your tax/VAT period end. The tax/VAT will be considered as due on the tax date of the transaction, and not when it's paid.
  
  
• HTML document layouts, you can now control the format of numeric fields by entering extra statements within the HTML code. Of particular use is the ability to control the number of decimal places and whether or not a number appears if it's value is zero. See Help in the HTML editor for details.
  
  
• Print/PDF document layouts, you can now put an image into the background, so any objects occupying the same space in the layout will appear in front of it. There is also a new 'rectangle' object that can be used to put a border around sections of a layout, or to use as background shading (it can be put into the background the same as images now can). The addition of these two extra facilities makes a big difference to the design possibilities for a layout.
  
  
• Print/PDF document layouts, now use the Arial font as standard instead of Courier. All standard layouts that come with the software have been converted to Arial, and have a few extra modifications to improve the overall look of them. Any layouts you have not edited will be automatically updated.
  
  
• Print/PDF document layouts, there is now a button 'Change All Fonts in the Layout' that allows you to change all the fonts in one go. Much quicker than editing each object individually.
  
  
• Cafe/Shop Manager module, the tab reference on a receipt is now selectable (in settings) as 'Table' or 'Counter'. Also, if there is no tab reference, the receipt now prints 'Counter served by'.
  
  
• In the print/PDF document layouts, the data field 'Our Rep___' displayed a number instead of the name of the sales representative associated with the customer account. Fixed.
  
  
• Remittance Advices: if the button 'Add Items Due for Payment to Remittance' was clicked, and then the button 'Add ALL Items to Remittance' was clicked, sometimes an invoice not due for payment when then added to the list of invoices for payment would be overwritten by an invoice already in the list of invoices to be paid. Fixed.
  
  
• When viewing sales invoice details, the 'Payment' button would be enabled even if the invoice was not outstanding. Fixed.
  
  
• When viewing a customer Credit Note, the button to print a Delivery Note was still active, even though clicking it did nothing. This only applies when the software was running in 'Level 2'. Fixed. It's now disabled when viewing a Credit Note.
  
  
• United Kingdom payroll: if no employees were due a salary payment in the pay period, the payroll could not be processed in order to allow it to be brought forward to the next pay period. Fixed.
  
  

v4.236 13th November 2021

• The list of Estimates in A/c Receivable (Sales Ledger) can now be filtered on whether an invoice or proforma invoice has been created from the estimate. There is a pre-existing filter for cancelled estimates, both that and new filter are 'sticky'. In that what ever you set them to, that setting will remain until it's changed.
  
  
• AutoManager, Service Counter, jobs had stopped operating in v4.235. When job details appeared, all input fields were 'read only'. Fixed.
  
  

v4.235 9th November 2021

• When entering Purchase Invoices/Credit Notes, and 'Allow stock selection' is enabled, if the user enters something into the 'Description of item/service' that is not a valid stock code/SKU, a warning will briefly appear to let them know.
  
  
• When entering Purchase Invoices/Credit Notes, and 'Allow stock selection' and 'Allow stock update' are enabled, it a stock item doesn't have a Purchase Analysis code, the Purchase Analysis code entered into the Invoices/Credit Note will be used to update the stock item. This option is turned off by default. So, if required in needs to be enabled in settings.
  
  
• The supplier record for a stock item will now allow the same supplier to be listed more than once for a particular item, provided the suppliers part code is different. This is to allow for those suppliers that issue a different part code for items on special offer. Also, notes have now been added to this window.
  
  
• Purchase Orders, purchase invoices, and the stock returned and stock received options: as well as entering the SKU as normal, you can now enter the suppliers part code instead, and it will select the item based on that. This is useful where there may be two or more supplier records of some stock items (perhaps one uses particular stock code for a special price).
  
  
• There is now an option in the installation program, available when updating the software, to delete old backups created by the update. This same option is also available within Adminsoft Accounts itself, in the 'System' menu from the drop down 'Setup' menu.
  
  
• It is now possible to select any customer or supplier transaction to put into dispute, not just invoices (although once an invoice was selected, transactions of any type could be added to a dispute).
  
  
• General Ledger/Nominal Ledger, Locate Journal by Ref. option, when you have selected a journal to view, you can now click the 'View Different Transaction' button to select another. Previously you had to exit the Locate Journal by Ref. option and go back in it to select another transaction.
  
  
• The 'Price List' report in Inventory/Stock Control can list items for a selected supplier.
  
  
• Sales Invoices and Credit Notes: if they were set to not allow back dating, the setting would sometimes prevent the transactions from being edited. Fixed.
  
  
• If the displayed text was set to be lager than standard, if the General Reminders option was used to generate a reminder, that reminder window would change size when ever any other option was started up, such as account details, stock item details, etc. Fixed.
  
  

v4.234 20th September 2021

• The 'Stock List' option in the Inventory/Stock Control menu is now far more sophisticated, and allows stock items to be listed using range and filter selections similar to the General Stock Report.
  
  
• Supplier account details now show a total amount for any transactions in dispute (only available when operating in Level 2).
  
  
• When a customer or supplier account is on stop, a warning will appear in certain places where the user needs to know the status of the account. If a customer account is on stop, it is not possible to raise a new job in AutoManager for that customer. If a supplier account is on stop, it is not possible to raise a Purchase Order for that supplier.
  
  
• Sales Invoices/Credit Notes, when existing transactions were viewed, various buttons were incorrectly enabled or disabled depending on the setting as to whether invoices with a zero balance are allowed to be posted or not. Fixed.
  
  
• Stock Control/Inventory, when adding a new supplier record to the list of suppliers for a stock item, it would often not allow some suppliers to be added, incorrectly saying they were already listed. Fixed.
  
  
• Backing up: if the data for a company/organization is held in an alternative location, the options for backing up images were not available (they were greyed out). Fixed.
  
  

v4.233 13th September 2021

• Stock Control/Inventory, there is now a new report in the 'Miscellaneous Reports' option to list stock adjustments in the order of their reason for adjustment.
  
  
• The 'Last Purchase' report in Inventory / Stock Control, now has an extra option to only print the last two purchase prices if they are different.
  
  
• Both Purchase Order and Delivery Note (from A/c Receivable / Sales Ledger) layouts now have the CN code data field available.
  
  
• The contents of an email shot are now recorded, and can be viewed at any time using the new option 'Previous Email Shots'.
  
  
• When entering a sales invoice, credit note, advice note, or estimate, if it's not in the ledger currency you can now edit the exchange rate. If the transaction is later edited, the exchange rate can also be edited.
  
  
• The Audit Trail report now has an extra report width of 162 columns. This will print the transaction reference using a full 40 characters. It also can also print larger debit/credit values to 999,999,999,999,99 The 90 and 134 column reports limited the number size to 999,999,999.99
  
  
• AutoManager: Service Counter, the miles/km input field in a job for servicing a vehicle or piece of equipment has been increased from a maximum 8 digits to 10 digits.
  
  
• AutoManager: Service Counter, you can now edit the description of some of the vehicle/equipment data items. Such as the 'Make', 'Model', etc. The new option is called 'Data Field Descriptions' and is in the AutoManager setup menu.
  
  
• Shop/Cafe Manager: the payments window can now accept up to three currencies. This feature must be enabled in the settings option.
  
  
• When using the software in a multi-user environment, if a user tries to login and there are too many users on the system, they have the opportunity to log another user. But the option didn't work. Fixed.
  
  
• Stock Control / Inventory, in stock item details, if an associated item was edited, the SKU input field was limited to just 8 characters (it should be 20). Fixed.
  
  
• General Stock Report, if a filter was used along side a list (selected in the 'Select Any Lists to Print for Each Item' section, lists could appear often with no stock item details above. Fixed.
  
  
• Sales Invoices/Credit Notes: when edited, if the currency was changed but nothing was changed in the body of invoice/credit note (quantity, description, etc.), the Sales Tax/VAT analysis goods figure would be wrong. Fixed.
  
  
• Data Integrity Check: mis-reported the 'date of last sale' on stock booked out to a job in the AutoManager module. It would report an issue when in fact there was none. Fixed.
  
  
• If the accounts system's base currency was changed, it could create issues with new transactions if the exchange rate of the new currency was not set to 1 prior to being set to the new base currency. Fixed.
  
  
• UK only: the PAYE Calculator option was not allowing the current tax year to be selected. Fixed.
  (note: this may not be fixed in any downloads prior to 18:30 BST 11th Sept.'21)
  
  
• Stock Control/Inventory, when a stock adjustment was entered, if it was a negative amount, it did not update the 'remaining' figure in stock movements used when running stock under FIFO or LIFO. Fixed.
  
  
• The Backup data and Restore Data options stopped working in v4.232 if the data was not held in the default location. Fixed.
  
  

v4.231 3rd August 2021

• In the email shot options, it is now possible to send the emails out from a separate program that runs in the background. This frees up Adminsoft Accounts, allowing you to continue working while the background program (Email Engine) is steadily sending out your emails. Sorry, but this new option is not available when the software is running as Freeware.
  
  
• There is now an Opted Out list for emails. Any emails entered into this list will not get emailed in one of the email shot options. This allows email addresses in customer/supplier accounts to be opted out. As the email input fields in the account details form can contain more than one email address, there is no 'Allow email shot' option (as there is in the contact details). From the top menu bar, the option is in Setup -> Miscellaneous -> Setup Email Opted Out List
  
  
• In Inventory / Stock Control, there is a new report called 'Last Purchase'. This will list the last purchase of each item, along with the previous purchase, to allow you to compare prices/suppliers.
  
  
• When creating a Sales Invoice from Advice Notes, there is an option in setup to change the default text "Advice Note reference" that gets added into the Invoice body. It can also be setup to not add any extra lines between Advice Notes at all, so the items on each Advice Note would appear in the invoice in one continuous list.
  
  
• In the option listing stock items supplied by a particular supplier, if defaults to listing in SKU order. But it can now also list in description or suppliers part code order. There is also now another option next to this one, that will display the items in Purchase Analysis order.
  
  
• When entering purchase invoices, if the option 'Allow stock selection' is selected, the last cost (from that supplier) will be automatically entered into the 'Each' column. However, this facility is not operational by default, it must be switched on in the ledgers 'Settings' option.
  
  
• In the Payment Forecast option in the Debtors Control window, you can now click on the likely payment figures to see a list of the transactions the software used to calculate the likely payment for that week.
  
  
• When entering batched transactions into A/c Receivable or A/c Payable Ledgers (Sales or Purchase Ledgers), there is now an option (in the respective Setup's) to get the software to confirm the user wishes to post the batch when the 'Post Batch' button is clicked. The default is to just post the batch right away, as soon as the 'Post Batch' button is clicked.
  
  
• Purchase Order print/PDF layout has two extra data fields added: one to print the SKU only, and another to print the stock item description only.
  
  
• Stock Control/Inventory, in the stock item supplier details record, it was possible to manually change the supplier account and create a duplicate supplier record for the item. The software now prevents this from happening.
  
  
• Stock Control/Inventory, in the stock item supplier details record now records the last cost from purchase Invoices as well as Purchase Orders.
  
  
• The maximum size of a report can now be specified in Setup -> Miscellaneous -> General settings The minimum is 1,000 pages, and the maximum is 100,000 pages. The default size is set to 10,000 pages (when it could not be edited it was fixed at 50,000 pages). The reason for allowing the maximum report size to be changed is due to one user who reported memory issues. If your report doesn't work or worse, crashes the application, try reducing the maximum report size. Note, this applies regardless of what the report is being output to, and can cause memory issues even if the actual report produced is very small. Memory is allocated at the start of the report, based on the maximum specified size.
  
  
• When entering a Purchase Invoice which will update stock, it will update the 'Date of last purchase' in the stock item details with the invoice date, even if the invoice date pre-dates the current 'Date of last purchase'. Fixed.
  
  
• AutoManager module, when a stock item was booked out from the Service Counter, the 'Date of Last Sale' in the stock item details was not updated with the date the item was booked out. Fixed.
  
  
• Stock/Inventory Control, the 'Date of Last Price Update' was not being updated. Fixed.
  
  
• Stock/Inventory Control, the 'Sales Analysis' and 'Sales Analysis by Periods' reports did not include stock items booked out in the Service Counter option in AutoManager. Fixed.
  
  
• In the 'Upload Document Layouts to Web Site' option (Setup -> System), the 'Remove' button failed to remove a document that had been uploaded to the web site. Fixed.
  
  
• The Statement of Income report (what used to be Profit & Loss), when just part of the financial year was selected and the account periods were to show in separate columns, when output to a spreadsheet the column titles for each period did not line up. Fixed.
  
  

v4.230 24th June 2021

• When entering Purchase Invoices, the green help text along the bottom is now a little more relevant to the input field the cursor is in. It also displays the cost on the last P/O when in the 'Description of item/service' or 'Each' input fields.
  
  
• When entering a Sales Invoice, Estimate, Proforma or Advice Note, if the 'Ins' button was used to open up a blank line between existing lines, the last line in the invoice would not get included in the sub-total (although it would when posted/saved). Fixed.
  
  

v4.229 7th June 2021

• United Kingdom only: the 'List Trans' button in the CIS Return option now displays the same columns as the CIS Return, making it easier to see where the CIS figures have come from. It can also now be dragged wider to display a lot more detail about each transaction.
  
  
• When entering a purchase invoice, you can now right click into the 'Description of item/service' input field if it's a stock item, and the stock item details window will appear.
  
  
• The 'Statenent of Financial Position' report would output the report into whatever format or application was selected. If the selection was changed, the report run, then 'Run Report' button was clicked again, it would output to whatever format or application was selected before. Fixed.
  
  
• Recurring Transactions, if setup for a date in the past, when you exit the 'Recurring Transactions' option it will ask if you want it to make the postings to bring it up to date. If you answer 'Yes', then go back and check the details of the recurring transaction, when you exit, it will again ask if you want it to make the postings to bring it up to date. If you answer 'Yes', it will duplicate the transactions already posted. Fixed.
  
  
• Sales invoices, when a stock item on the last line of the invoice contained extra description lines and/or a surcharge, they would appear in the invoice, but would not get saved. Fixed.
  
  

v4.228 21st May 2021

• Stock item details, the list of suppliers will now include the name of the item manufacturer (in curly brackets after the supplier name), if one exists.
  
  
• Stock Control/Inventory, when using the 'Stock Item Search' option, you can now filter by supplier account. This can make searching a lot faster, but relies on a supplier item cost record existing in the stock item details.
  
  
• Supplier invoices, where a supplier supplies items in multiple units (boxes of 5, or 10, etc), you can now enter the total number of units and the total price (enter into the 'Each' column), then you can single right click on the 'Amount' column, and the unit price will be calculated and automatically entered into the 'Each' column. Saves time having to use a calculator.
  
  
• When entering batched sales or purchase transactions, the batch cannot now be saved or posted if there is a transction still be worked on, or it's sitting ready for a new transaction. This is to prevent a batch from being accidentally posted when it's not complete.
  
  
• Email shots, any email address entered into the CC or BCC input fields should only get sent one email, right at the start of the send process. But emails were being sent to CC and BCC recipients for every email that was going out. Fixed.
  
  
• When a sales invoice was generated from the AutoManager module, the stock code SKU would appear to be doubled up when looking at the costs in the invoice details (two SKU's would appear on the same line side by side). Fixed.
  
  
• United Kingdom: when submitting an MTD VAT return, HMRC returned an error 400 'Invalid JSON'. Fixed.
  
  

v4.226 11th May 2021

• United Kingdom only, MTD VAT submissions stopped working. Produced an 'Invalid JSON' error message. Fixed.
  
  
• United Kingdom only, The VAT 100 figures when using the Flat Rate scheme and importing services from the EU did not calculate the import correctly (it did when not using the Flat Rate scheme). Fixed
  
  

v4.225 6th May 2021

• The account system can now be set to use none ISO4217 currencies (such as a digital currency) as the base ledger currency.
  
  
• The Print/PDF and HTML document layouts for sales invoices now include data fields for displaying the amount of the invoice already paid, and the amount still outstanding. It's displayed as a message rather than just a number, and does not display at all if the figure would be zero. It only works for transactions in the ledger currency.
  
  
• Sales Invoices, in both print/PDF and HTML layouts there are two new data fields. One that will show the total amount of the discounts given on each line of the invoice, and one showing the discount rate (based on all items on the invoice whether discounted or not). This can only work where items are invoiced from stock and there is a retail value for stock item.
  
  
• Sales Invoices now have an option to be converted to an Estimate (the original invoice remains intact). The button is marked 'Credit or Est.' and when clicked it gives you the choice of creating a Credit Note or an Estimate.
  
  
• Purchase invoices, when entering a stock item, if the invoice is set to search for stock items it will first search for items using the suppliers part code, and only search the main stock database if no specific supplier part code is found.
  
  
• When entering sales or purchase invoices, if a stock item was selected using the 'F' button to find it, the stock code/SKU now gets recorded in the autocomplete function (if this is enabled). Allowing you to select it in the future for that customer/supplier account without using the 'F' button.
  
  
• In the supplier account details, when listing stock items purchased from that supplier, there is now an option that will just display the last purchase of any one stock item. This can be useful when checking an invoice to see how/if prices have changed.
  
  
• HTML layouts for Invoices, Credit Notes, Proforma's, Estimates, and Advice Notes can now have the number of decimal places controlled for several of the numerical data items. You can find the settings in the 'Layout Defaults' option in the 'HTML Document Layouts' section.
  
  
• There is now an option to list purchase invoices that contain accrual/prepayment postings. Also, the actual postings can now be listed from several places within the system.
  
  
• In Stock Control/Inventory the option 'List Supercessions' now has the option to convert a supersession into a regular stock item, and convert ALL supercessions into regular items (that option has to be enabled in Setup).
  
  
• New sales invoices, the 'Images' button would not work. Fixed.
  
  
• Payroll, at the start of a new tax year or when moving the payroll forward to the next pay period, it would allow the user to do this without entering a pay period end date. Fixed.
  
  
• Payroll, when not running in the United Kingdom, in the employees pay details, the 'Pay an Advance on Salary' button did not work. Fixed.
  
  
• United Kingdom only, when operating under the Construction Industry Scheme, an aged debtor or creditor report would not produce the correct figures when backdated. It didn't take the CIS deductions into account. Fixed.
  
  
• Remittance Advices, when a transaction on a remittance had the amount paid set to 0.00 it would automatically be removed from the list of transactions to pay, and would appear in the bottom list of transactions with outstanding amounts. But it could not be reselected for that remittance. Also, on the narrower version of the Remittance Advice form, when an unpaid Remittance Advice was loaded up, the 'Pay Remittance' button would sometimes be greyed out. Both issues fixed.
  
  

v4.224 6th April 2021

• Purchase Orders: There is now an option in settings that controls whether or not the suppliers part code is added to a P/O (if different from the regular SKU).
  
  
• Scrolling using he mouse wheel has now been added to the General Ledger/Nominal Ledger options for recurring and standing transactions. All forms that work in this manner should now contain this feature.
  
  
• Supplier invoices, the 'Allow stock selection' in the bottom left hand corner, when not ticked it will not now search for stock items as they are typed into the 'Description of item/service' column.
  
  
• In the Import PayPal Sales option, the option to list previous PayPal imports has an option to list the individual PayPal transactions, but this did not format the list correctly. Fixed.
  
  
• General Ledger/Nominal Ledger, when the budgets option is selected, all departments associated with all budgets can initially appear in the department list, instead of just the departments for the selected budget group, making the option a little confusing. Fixed.
  
  
• The autocomplete feature (where previously typed in text appears in a drop down list) could sometimes record duplicate text. This particularly happened when entering invoices. Fixed.
  
  
• In the 'List/Maintain Backups' option in the 'System' menu under Setup, if the 'Help' button was clicked, the help window would appear behind the 'List/Maintain Backups' option, locking up both. Only way out was to click 'Exit' on the top menu bar. Fixed.
  
  
• United Kingdom only, when printing the P60's, where the NI letter of an employee changed during the year, only one NI letter and set of NI deductions would be reported on their P60. Fixed.
  
  
• Supplier invoices, the 'Images' button was greyed out when entering a new invoice, and the 'Documents' button, although not greyed out, had stopped working. Fixed.
  
  
• When entering sales invoices, if an overall discount rate was set in the customer account details, it would only be automatically applied when the software was running in Level 2 and using the wider sales invoice form (this would be automatically selected depending on available screen space). Fixed.
  
  
• If a purchase invoice was converted to a credit note using the 'Credit Note' button on the invoice details displayed, the conversion was fine, apart from 'Quantity' column which would only show a negative number after the cursor had been through the input field. Except on the first line. Fixed.
  
  
• When in the HTML layout editor, if the 'Help' button was clicked, the help window would appear but then hang the accounts system. Fixed.
  
  

v4.223 1st March 2021

• Invoices and credit notes for sales and purchases, purchase orders, stock received and returned options and all similar forms can now be scrolled using the mouse wheel.
  
  
• Supplier invoices, the description has been moved from the 'Details' tab to the front, just below the tax date and suppliers invoice/credit note reference. This does not apply if the software is running in basic level.
  
  
• Sales Invoices, the payment button can now fire up the regular payment option or the cash payment option depending on the settings. Also, if it's set to fire up the regular payment option, you can force it to fire up the cash payment option instead by right clicking the button. And vice versa if the default is to fire up the cash payment option.
  
  
• Purchase Orders, if an order status is 'on order' and it's edited, details of the edits made are recorded, and available to view from the 'Edit History' button in the 'Details' section.
  
  
• Estimates Analysis report added.
  
  
• Shop/Cafe Manager: when selling an item, if the 'Discount' button was clicked for the discount option, if stock item prices did not include Sales Tax/VAT, it would not calculate the discount correctly. Fixed.
  
  
• Purchase Orders, if it's edited and a stock item is changed to a different item on an order that is still 'on order', the items ordered still show as being on order on the original item. Fixed.
  
  
• Purchase Orders, if a stock item is added to a P/O and the item has a part code specific to that supplier, the suppliers part code is not shown in the P/O. Fixed.
  
  
• Purchase Orders, on a live order, if the button 'All Items Received' was clicked,any items on the P/O that were not stock items got ignored. Fixed.
  
  
• In the Company/Organization details from the start up window, if the 'Help' button was clicked, the help form opened up behind the Company/Organization details form, effectively locking up the application. Fixed.
  
  
• When creating a new company/organization, if the AutoManager module wasn't selected, an error message would appear during the creation of the ledgers saying the file "AM_EV.DBF" could not be opened. Fixed.
  
  
• Sales/Profit Analysis report had some layout issues. Fixed.
  
  
• Stock Control/Inventory, the General Price List report did not report prices correctly due to issues with Sales Tax/VAT. Fixed.
  
  

v4.222 16th February 2021

• The option 'Defaults and Variables', which is in the setup menu of most modules, has been renamed to 'Settings'.
  
  
• The Aged Invoices List for both customers and suppliers now has a payment option. Simply select an invoice, click the 'Payment' button, and the details of the invoice are loaded up in the payment windows ready. Makes paying single invoices quick and easy.
  
  
• The 'Payment' button on sales Invoices now brings up the regular payment window, rather than the cash payment window.
  
  
• The feedback form that appears when the application is closed down, will now only appear up to a maximum of 10 times. If it hasn't been filled in by then, it gives up.
  
  
• When the 'Copy' button is clicked on a Sales Invoice, it replicates the invoice details as it should, but it also copied the original invoice number, instead of generating a new number. Fixed.
  
  
• United Kingdom only: CIS Returns and Verifications require a Tax Office Reference in order to work. It was not possible to enter this in the set up for CIS. Fixed.
  
  
• If the Help text window was set to full screen, the help text its self did nto change width. Fixed.
  
  
• Shop/Cafe Manager stopped accepting input from a bar code scanner. Fixed.
  
  
• United Kingdom only: MTD VAT return submissions may not have worked due to a bug introduced in v4.220. Fixed.
  
  

v4.220 6th February 2021

• When entering Sales Invoices or Credit Notes, you can now enter a reference number manually, into the top right hand corner. If you do not enter a reference number, the software will automatically generate one as before. When editing an Invoice or Credit Note, you can also edit the reference number.
  
  
• When a list of General Ledger (or Nominal Ledger) accounts appears as part of a find option, there is now a facility for listing them in description order, instead of the default account code order.
  
  
• When cloning a stock item, a window will now popup to ask whether you also want to copy the suppliers, associated items, alternative items and/or special prices.
  
  
• United Kingdom only: payroll has now been updated ready for the 2021-22 tax year.
  
  
• Some forms that allow selection of various parameters for a report have a lot of options pre-selected (using tick boxes). There is now a small button that will un-tick them all, allowing the user to quickly just select the options they require.
  
  
• United Kingdom only: when creating a new VAT code, the option to select 'UK Domestic Reverse Charge' was greyed out. Fixed.
  
  
• United Kingdom only: when viewing a previous CIS submission, XXX's were put in to the more sensitive fields such as the HMRC gateway ID. This is only supposed to happen in test mode. Fixed.
  
  
• United Kingdom only: the Domestic Reverse Charge for VAT was not adding the figure into Box 4 in the VAT 100 report. Fixed. This new VAT scheme is not due to be used until 1st March 2021.
  
  
• The report Statement of Financial Position (what we used to call the Balance Sheet), produced very large, and obviously wrong subtotals when reporting by department. Fixed.
  
  
• When adding items to a stock kit, if the stock code is entered manually (ie. the search option isn't used) and the stock code entered is a supersession, the superseded item was added to the kit, instead of the item it superseded to. Fixed.
  
  

v4.219 4th January 2021

• The 'Payment Type Analysis' reports for both customers and suppliers displayed the payment figures as negative values. They are now displaying as positive values, making it slightly easier to read.
  
  
• In the customer account details form, when listing Proforma Invoices, Advice Notes, or Estimates, there is now an option not to display those that have already been invoiced.
  
  
• Existing sales Invoice and Credit Notes can now have none stock items in the 'Costs' section edited without needing to click the main 'Edit' button. This can not be done for stock items, as they generate postings into the stock system and sometimes the General Ledger (Nominal Ledger), which can only be done when the Invoice or Credit Note can be fully edited.
  
  
• In the company/organization details, if an 'Alternative location for data' is entered with a backslash at the end of the path, the software would report that no data has been found. If the location was entered without a backslash, it would be fine, and the software would then apply a backslash. Fixed.
  
  
• In the 'Money Paid (single)' and 'Money Received (single)' options in the General Ledger (Nominal Ledger), if a tax exclusive amount was not entered, just the tax code and the total amount inclusive of tax, several input fields would have to be tabbed through to get the 'OK' button to enable. Fixed.
  
  
• When the accounts system is running in Basic mode, the alternative customer address button in Invoice and Credit Note details didn't work. Fixed.
  
  
• In stock item details, if the 'Quote Price' button was clicked, after selecting a customer a message would appear "Stock item data record not found?". The option would work, but it would not display a cost for the item. Fixed.
  
  
• When listing quoted stock item prices from a customer account, if an item was selected, and the 'Stock Item Details' button clicked, the wrong stock item details would often appear. Fixed.
  
  

v4.218 6th November 2020

• The 'Receive Stock from Supplier' option now checks the suppliers delivery note reference and the date to make sure the user is not about to enter a duplicate Delivery Note. A warning message will appear if it suspects a duplicate.
  
  
• In customer account details, Proforma invoices, advice notes, estimates, saved, and recurring transactions now only display up to a given age (default is 2 years). This can be changed when in account details. Also, the default can be edited in the setup 'Defaults and Variables' option.
  
  
• In the email shot options, customers or suppliers can now also be selected based on transactions, and the sales or purchase analysis codes used within those transactions. They also have a much better facility for outputting data to a CSV file, or directly into Excel or OpenOffice Calc spreadsheets
  
  
• A new report: List Customers by Business Type Code has been added to the 'Miscellaneous Reports' option.
  
  
• United Kingdom only: the domestic VAT reverse charge now operates on sales invoices (previously it only worked on purchase invoices).
  
  
• United Kingdom only: payroll, you can now send an FPS if none of the employees on a payroll are due any payment, provided they have all been processed. This is useful if there is no pay in a particular period, or you need to notify HMRC of an employee/s leaving without waiting until the next pay period.
  
  
• When sending an email from within Adminsoft Accounts, it is now possible to browse your files and drag and drop files into the list of attachments. You can drag and drop several files at once if you wish.
  
  
• When using the 'Money Received (Single)' or 'Money Paid Out (single)' options, and the total amount is entered (ie. the amount including any Sales Tax/VAT), some combinations of tax rate and amount could cause the figure entered to change by one penny. This change was visible to the the user, so they could correct it, but of course it was still irritating. Fixed.
  
  
• In stock item details, if the 'Re-balance Stock' option was used, and the costing method was anything other than FIFO or LIFO, the 'Cost Analysis' would always show the FIFO and LIFO item cost as zero. Fixed.
  
  
• When a sales invoice or credit note was deleted that contained stock items, the retail price in the stock movement records that adjusted the stock may have a retail price set to 0.00. Fixed.
  
  
• When adding security profiles to an Adminsoft Accounts user, any changes to the profile could not be saved. Fixed.
  
  
• When setting up to send email, the 'Send Test Email' button ignored the SMTP TLS setting. Fixed.
  
  
• The Cash/Bank Balances graph in the Financial Summary background could put balances into the graph a year early if a cash/bank account had no transactions for the first year of the graph (it goes back two years). Fixed.
  
  
• United Kingdom only, in the EPS, the SMP, SPP, SAP, etc. should all accept 2 decimal places, but they would only accept whole numbers. Fixed.
  
  

v4.216 5th October 2020

• The Statement of Income (Profit & Loss) and the Statement of Financial Position (Balance Sheet) reports can now list the transactions.
  
  
• Stock Control/Inventory now has a valuation report that can display the total item in stock, total cost, and total retail value as at any given date.
  
  
• When creating or viewing a Purchase Order, the account reference your supplier uses for you is now displayed. This is termed 'Their A/c Ref.'
  
  
• The option 'Wholesale Stock Changes' can now change discounted retail prices (where there is no sales discount code) and customers special prices.
  
  
• Stock item prices can now be setup as inclusive or exclusive of Sales Tax/VAT regardless of which software modules have been selected. Previously, if Shop/Cafe Manager was in use, then stock prices would always be inclusive of Sales Tax/VAT. The option is in the 'Defaults and Variables' option in Stock Control/Inventory setup.
  
  
• In the 'Database - Fixing' option, the 'General Stock Data' button now also corrects the 'Reserved' stock figure in the stock item details.
  
  
• Emailshots can now include attachments.
  
  
• When entering payments made or received directly into the General Ledger (Nominal Ledger), you can now enter the amount including any Sales Tax/VAT, and the amount excluding tax and the tax amount will be calculated for you. This makes input a little faster than using the 'Tax Calculator' button (which has now been removed).
  
  
• When the details of a stock item are displayed, and another item is superceeded to it using the 'Add Supercession' button, all the information from the item being superceeded is merged with the selected item. This should also apply where stock items are being imported from external data.
  
  
• The Stock Sales Analysis report can now be produced in profit amount or profit % order. There is also a Stock Sales Analysis by Period report that can show sales/profit broken down by week, month, quarter or year.
  
  
• When a stock item is superceeded, the bin locations from the item being superceeded are copied into the stock item it's being superceeded to. Provided there are sufficient empty bin location data fields. There is also an option to fully merge the details of each stock item.
  
  
• Stock reserved for a customer and prices quoted to a customer can now be listed for a particular customer from the customer account details.
  
  
• The 'Re-Balance Stock' button in the 'Movements' tab of the stock item details set the quantity in stock, total cost, and remaining items in each stock movement if FIFO or LIFO were being used to zero. Fixed.
  
  
• Trial Balance Report, if transactions are included, it always listed the transactions from the start of the financial year regardless of the account periods selected. Fixed.
  
  
• When using oversize form and font sizes (from the 'Change font and form sizes' option in the 'Help' menu), the 'Quantity' input field did not line up properly in supplier invoices. Some digits to the right (pence/cents) could not be seen or only partially seen. Fixed.
  
  
• In start up screen, if it was dragged smaller, making it too small would cause it to hang. Also, clicking the 'List Current Users' button from that screen would cause it to hang. Fixed.
  
  

v4.215 1st September 2020

• When entering a supplier invoice or credit note, with the accounts system in 'Level 1: Basic' mode, you can now edit the Sales Tax/VAT amounts calculated.
  
  
• There is now a general purpose calculator available in the 'General' menu. There is one in Windows as standard, of course. But this one is probably easier/quicker to get to, and it maybe more useful.
  
  
• When creating a Purchase Order, when a stock item is entered it checks to see if there is a supplier record for that item. If there is it will use the suppliers published cost or the last purchase cost, which ever one is less. There is now an option in the 'Defaults and Variables' option in the P/O set up menu, that allows you to tell it to just use the published cost, if required.
  
  
• Payroll, United Kingdom only. When P45 or P60's are printed, you can now select a Windows printer.
  
  
• Stock Item Details now have an extra tab specifically for listing purchases. This includes and stock movements generated by purchase invoices, P/O's, and the 'Receive Stock from Supplier' option. It can also list all purchases within the last 12 months in cost per item order, to allow you to easily determine the cheapest supplier.
  
  
• In Stock/Inventory Control, FIFO and LIFO cost methods are both maintained regardless of which cost method is actually in use. This allows the cost method to be changed without necessarily having to get the system to re-calculate all the costs each time. Although we still recommend you do that, because the total cost of stock for each item may not be correct. We also still recommend that once a cost method is selected, it is better to stick with it, if possible.
  
  
• It's now possible to prevent customer Invoices and Credit Notes from being back dated. The option is in the A/c Receivable (Sales Ledger) set up option 'Defaults and Variables'.
  
  
• In the Adminsoft Accounts user security profile, it's now possible to specify whether the user can create customer Credit Notes or not.
  
  
• When printing a supplier invoice, as the layout for these can not be edited, the gap between the SKU and the description for stock items has been closed up. To get more of the description on a line.
  
  
• Payroll (not United Kingdom), the 'Pay All Employees' button had the wrong caption. It said 'Undo All Payments' instead, although it did pay all employees if clicked, so it worked, it was just misleading. Fixed.
  
  
• When adding a supercession to a an existing stock item, the input field was limited to only 8 characters, when it should be 20. Fixed.
  
  
• When importing stock items from an external data file, if the retail or cost price were included in the data, the date of the last price change was not updated. Fixed.
  
  
• When raising a Sales Invoice, if it's then saved rather than posted to the account, when it's worked on again later the costs of any stock items could no longer be edited. Fixed.
  
  
• Trial Balance report, if 'Include opening balances' was not selected, it would show balances for the year to what ever period was selected, even when it was supposed to show balances for a specific period or range of periods. Fixed.
  
  
• In Stock Control/Inventory, a user could delete a stock movement even if they only had 'read only' access to stock. Fixed.
  
  

v4.214 1st August 2020

• UNITED KINGDOM - SERIOUS ISSUE WITH FLAT RATE VAT
  United Kingdom only, when using the VAT Flat Rate Scheme, sales transactions posted directly into the Nominal Ledger or through Shop/Cafe Manager as cash transactions, the VAT due calculation for the VAT100 report only used the goods/service sales figure. It did not add the VAT amount to the goods/services figure before working out the VAT due. So the VAT calculated as due could be lower than it should be. Resulting in a possible underpayment of VAT. This issue is now fixed, but the fix is NOT retrospective, it will not automatically correct itself on your next VAT return. So you may wish to check your previous VAT returns for any sales posted directly into the N/L or via Cafe/Shop Manager. It is not known how long this error existed. If you only enter sales via the Sales Ledger or AutoManager, this issue does not affect you.
  
  
• When loading up a saved sales Invoice or Credit Note to continue working on it, the tax date will default to 'today's date'.
  
  
• When allocating a transaction (often a payment), the list of transactions it can be allocated to will show an * next to the date of any transaction that is in dispute. Also, the 'Automatically Allocate' button will not automatically allocate to any disputed transaction.
  
  
• United Kingdom only, payroll: P45's can now be printed out directly from the software. These have been laid out to HMRC specifications. The option is in the employee details, and appears when a leaving date has been entered. But, only when the employee details are re-loaded, because their final payslip should be processed and ideally and FPS should be run before printing a P45.
  
  
• United Kingdom only, payroll: P60's have now been created to HMRC specifications and have received their approval. The P60's can be printed, sent to PDF files, or emailed out to each employee. Of course these P60's are not actually required until April 2021.
  
  
• The Trial Balance report, the settings have been changed to make it easier to select the account period range and report options. This may be extended to the Profit and Loss and Balance Sheet reports, depending on user feedback.
  
  
• When Stock Item details are displayed, the software uses one of two forms, depending on how much screen space is available. The smaller of the forms had an issue with the item 'Surcharge', in that it would not allow it to be 0.00. Fixed.
  
  
• When a Purchase Order was raised, if the quantity on order for a stock item was subsequently edited, the 'Purch Orders' figure in the stock item details did not change. Fixed.
  
  
• If a Purchase Order was received and marked as completed, then subsequently reversed. The quantity on order of any stock items did not get updated to reflect the fact the order was live again. Fixed.
  
  
• When entering a stock item into a supplier invoice (with using the find button), and it's set to search the stock file, it would not recognize the stock code if it was entered in lower case. Fixed.
  
  

v4.213 4th July 2020

• THIS IS A MAJOR CHANGE TO THE WAY INVOICES/CREDIT NOTES WORK. When entering a Sales Invoice or Credit Note, the costs in the 'Costs' section now indicate exactly what will happen to the stock. They are no longer just for the software to work out the profitability of the invoice. If you edit a cost, it is the value you enter that will be used when the stock is updated. You can also now enter a stock item into costs without entering it into the main body of the invoice.
  
  
• You can now create a Remittance Advice even if a payment has already been entered into the system. This can be done from the payment details, or just prior to it being allocated, or in the option that lists the transactions it's been allocated to.
  
  
• Payroll, United Kingdom, employer NI due for each employee has been added to the P60 report.
  
  
• Payroll, United Kingdom, when printing a P60 report, the employees NI details would not be printed if they did not earn enough to actually pay any NI. Fixed.
  
  
• When entering a Sales Invoice, if the 'Ins' buttons were used to insert a line into the body of the invoice, the last line of the invoice could get missed out when it was posted, although it would still appear in the invoice (but not if the invoice was subsequently re-loaded). Fixed.
  
  

v4.212 18th June 2020

• The 'Help' button on most forms when clicked would by default use Microsoft's IE to display the help page. However, there have been issues that mainly seem to involve Windows 10 and IE 11 which do not always allow third party software such as Adminsoft Accounts to access IE. So IE is no longer used. This means everyone should now be able to see the help pages.
  
  
• Stock/Inventory Control, the 'cost per' of stock items could be automatically changed by the software if it thought the price would lose accuracy otherwise. But this is causing some confusion, in particular when a customer's prices are based on a mark up on cost, their invoice could have a large number in the price 'Each' column. Which could represent a 'price per' of anything up to 10,000 units. So this automatic 'price/cost per' calculation has now been abandoned. It will only use what ever 'per' has been set up in the stock item details, for either retail or cost price.
  
  
• When creating a sales invoice, estimate or proforma and entering a stock item that has extra lines of description or a surcharge, the extra lines and/or surcharge were not appearing. This is an issue that has only developed recently. Fixed.
  
  
• When creating a sales invoice, stock items entered into the invoice not always correctly reporting if there is sufficient stock. Fixed.
  
  
• In stock item details, when finding a Sales Discount code or a Purchase Discount code, if 'Setup' was clicked in the list, it was not always possible to click the find button once in the discount details window. Fixed.
  
  
• The Database - Fix option, when fixing stock/inventory, if any costing method other than AVCO was being used, the option would set the total cost of stock for each item to zero. Fixed.
  
  
• When creating a customer Credit Note, the profit figure would be correct, but when the Credit Note was reloaded it would be wrong. Although could then correct itself later. Fixed.
  
  
• When converting a customer or supplier Invoice to a Credit Note, if the sales tax/VAT has been edited, and the user opted not to re-calculate the tax, the tax figures would be positive instead of negative. Fixed.
  
  

v4.211 11th June 2020

• Reports were limited to a maximum length of around 5,000 pages. This has now been increased to around 50,000 pages. Though please be aware processing very large reports of over 5,000 pages takes most PC's a long time.
  
  
• In Stock Control/Inventory, the 'List Supercessions' option now has a setting to just list supercessions that superceed to a non-existent item if required. Making it much quicker and easier to tidy them up.
  
  
• If a customer or supplier invoice was entered and the sales tax/VAT amount that's automatically calculated then edited, the invoice would not post with the correct tax amount. The problem would then be compounded it the invoice was subsequently edited. Fixed.
  
  
• The data integrity check when checking inventory would generate an error for all stock items that had a quantity in stock if the stock costing method was set to AVCO (Average Cost). Fixed.
  
  

v4.210 9th June 2020

• Remittance Advices now indicate if an Invoice is subject to Early Settlement Discount, and can take the reduced Invoice amount into account when making payment. This makes handling Early Settlement Discounts a lot easier. Note, it does not automatically post Early Settlement Discount transactions when payment is made, that still has to be done manually. Automatic posting currently isn't possible due to issues apportioning Sales Tax/VAT.
  
  
• If a Purchase Order is being raised in direct response to a customers requirements, the customer details displayed on the 'Details' page of the P/O are now clickable. Bringing up the customers account.
  
  
• When entering a purchase invoice, if a cost item needed to be accrued over a number of account periods, it used to default to 3. Now it defaults to the number of account periods in the financial year.
  
  
• Invoices, both sales and purchase when entered in a currency other than th ledger currency are prone to the odd 'penny' error due to rounding issues between currencies. More work has been done to try and prevent any 'penny' errors occurring.
  
  
• In stock item details, there are two new options to display an analysis of stock item sales by month or by year (which includes a break down of monthly sales). The buttons are in the 'Analysis' section, or if it's having to use the reduced width form, they will be in the 'Sales' section.
  
  
• Payroll, United Kingdom only, employee tax codes starting with the letters 'SK' or 'CK' would not be accepted as valid. Fixed.
  
  
• When a purchase invoice and payment were entered together as an 'Invoice receipt', if the payment was subsequently deleted, when displaying the invoice details, it would display as an 'Invoice Receipt'. In other words, as if the payment was still there (just a display issue, it didn't affect the accounts). Fixed.
  
  
• When entering a refund, in either ledger, if a transaction such as a payment was selected first, the value of that transaction would appear in the refund details as a negative figure, instead of a positive figure. Fixed.
  
  
• When a Sales Invoice or Credit Note was edited, if a stock item was added to it, it did not update the stock sales figures or the 'remaining' figures used for FIFI/LIFO correctly. Although the quantity in stock remained correct. Fixed.
  
  
• Sales invoices, if not in the ledger currency and had an early settlement discount setup, when the invoice was re-loaded, the early settlement amount shown would not be correct. (although the amount calculated and appearing elsewhere was correct) Fixed.
  
  
• The 'Print Form' and 'Print Screen' options in the 'Help' menu were no longer working. Fixed. Note, smaller forms will print in portrait, while larger forms and the screen will print in landscape. As it does not compress the image to fit the page, due to the large screen sizes often in use today, if you print the screen some of it may bleed off the page (some particularly wide forms may also do this). If you need to print the screen, you may have to use the 'Save Screen' option to save the image to a .JPG file, and then load it up into Microsoft Paint or some other graphics package and print it from there.
  
  
• When entering a sales invoice, if the same stock item was entered into the invoice more than once, and there was insufficient stock for the other item/s, it would not warn the user or stop the sale (which ever was required in the setup). Also, if a transaction with two more identical stock items on it was edited, it also would not always warn the user about stock levels. Fixed.
  
  
• When operating inventory using the AVCO costing method, the setup option 'Database - Fixing' did not always produce the correct 'Total Cost' of a stock item, depending on it's movement history. Fixed.
  
  

v4.208 6th May 2020

• United Kingdom only, payroll EPS would not be accepted by HMRC if claiming NIC employment allowance. Fixed.
  
  

v4.207 2nd May 2020

• If a Sales Invoice was edited, and a stock item added to it, the selling price of the new item would not appear in the stock movements. Fixed.
  
  
• If a sales Invoice that was generated from the AutoManager PartsCounter module was edited, it could remove the associated stock movement records. Fixed.
  
  
Both the above issues, and the one below, crept into the software in the v4.201 update (released on 11th March 2020) which enhanced the editing of invoices.



v4.206 1st May 2020

• IMPORTANT FIX: When an invoice generated from the Service Counter in the AutoManager module is edited, it can end up deleting a lot of stock movement records that are nothing to do with the invoice being edited. The ability to edit an invoice generated by Service Counter is now disabled.
  
  
• When an email was sent from within Adminsoft Accounts from the employees details window. The email sent was not recorded.
  
  
• Payroll, on some payslip formats, the date the employee was paid did not get printed. It just appeared as a few dots. Fixed.
  
  

v4.205 23rd April 2020

• United Kingdom only, when operating CIS as a sub-contractor, you can now opt not to print the amount due to be deducted on a sales invoice (option is in Setup -> Sales Ledger -> Defaults and Variables, Miscellaneous 2 tab).
  
  
• United Kingdom only, payroll NI tables, some input fields have been greyed out to make it clearer which fields are actually used for employee/employer and which are not.
  
  
• United Kingdom only, payroll, when selecting the option to edit the tax and NI tables, only the current tax year and previous tax year are now selectable. This is due to the number of changes HMRC have made particularly to the way NI is handled over the years.
  
  
• United Kingdom only, payroll NI tables, when editing the bands, validation messages would prevent the Secondary threshold band from being a lower figure that the Primary threshold. Fixed.
  
  
• Stock Control/Inventory, when adjusting stock on an item that has had no previous stock movements, the adjustment defaults to opening balance (though this can be changed when making the adjustment).
  
  

v4.204 21st April 2020

• IMPORTANT: UK Payroll only, the 'Primary threshold' and 'Secondary threshold' NI bands were the wrong way around. This resulted NI being incorrectly calculated. Fixed.
  
  
• When transactions are posted into the General ledger (Nominal Ledger) using a Recurring Transaction template, if that template is later deleted, when looking at a transaction posted by the Recurring Transaction template and the 'Source Transaction' button was clicked, a series of error messages would appear. Fixed.
  
  

v4.203 18th April 2020

• When entering a purchase invoice, and invoicing from a P/O, there is now an option in setup to enable or disable the copying of any extra description or comments in the body of the P/O to the invoice. The default is to allow them to be copied.
  
  
• When a sales invoice is edited, and a stock item is changed to a different item, the original stock items are not put back into stock. Fixed.
  
  
• When using the 'Copy' button in a sales Invoice, if invoicing from stock, the stock would not be updated when the copy invoice was posted. Fixed.
  
  
• When entering a sales invoice, and invoicing from stock, it a stock item was entered and then the quantity increased (ie. the 'Quantity' column edited), the cost may not always be correct if using FIFO or LIFO. It depended on whether there were enough items at the same cost to handle the increased quantity. Fixed.
  
  
• When entering a purchase invoice, and invoicing from a P/O, if the P/O contained any comments, those comments would appear in the body of the invoice, but indented 20 characters from the start of the 'Description of Item/Service' input field instead of at the start. Fixed.
  
  

v4.202 9th April 2020

• Supplier Invoices, when entering an invoice that will update stock, the Ctrl-F, Ctrl-R, and function keys F4, F5, and F8 now work just as they do when entering a sales invoice.
  
  
• Supplier Invoices, when running the accounts system in 'Basic Level', it would take three clicks from the mouse button to position the cursor into the quantity column. Fixed.
  
  
• Supplier Invoices, the supplier account default purchase analysis and sales tax/VAT codes where no longer appearing in the invoice. Fixed.
  
  
• AutoManager, workshop Job details, when a part is purchased from this option for a specific job, the Sales Tax/VAT code was not always accepted as valid. Fixed.
  
  
• When view stock movements in stock item details, if you tried to view the 'Original Transaction' and the movement was generated via the 'Receive Stock from Supplier' option, it would not display the original transaction. Fixed.
  
  
• In the Stock Item Details option, there are two Adjust Stock buttons. One in with the main buttons group, and one at the list of the stock movements list. This button next to the stock movements list would always be enabled regardless of the users access setting. Fixed.
  
  
• When viewing stock item details with the accounts system in 'Basic Level', the description input field always maintained a pink background. Fixed.
  
  

v4.201 11th March 2020

• Customer Invoices, Credit Notes, and Debits Notes, when being edited change the stock movement of a stock item if the quantity or cost has been edited. Previously, everything was put back into stock, and then taken out of stock again after the edit, regardless of what changed.
  
  
• Supplier Invoices, Credit Notes, and Debit Notes can now update stock. Note, when they are edited, they update the stock movement records only as necessary, as per sales transactions discussed above.
  
  
• Advice Notes that are not created from within Adminsoft Accounts, but are imported from third party software can now be deleted if necessary.
  
  
• When viewing Advice Notes, Proforma Invoices, and Estimates, if they have been invoiced, there is now a button that will display the invoice details.
  
  
• Payroll now set up ready for tax year 2020-21. United Kingdom only, international payroll not changed.
  
  
• In the customer menu, under 'Lists' the option 'Advice Notes' has now been renamed 'Customers with Live Advice Notes'. This lists all customers with un-invoiced Advice Notes, as before. A new option 'Advice Notes' (hence renaming the older option), lists the Advice Notes themselves. Both invoiced and un-invoiced (this is optional).
  
  
• In the 'Receive Stock from Supplier' and 'Send Stock Back to Supplier' options, if the Enter key was pressed at the end of line 12 in the 'Cost Each' column, control would go to the 'OK' button. This behaviour has now been changed, so the input form scrolls and control goes to the 'Quantity' column. As it does with most other similar input forms in the accounts system. This allows the user to keep using the Enter key when inputting data, without it suddenly ending the input session.
  
  
• Some users of the software have occasionally reported blank entries in the user log, which have then prevented them from backing up the data. So the backup option will now automatically detect and remove any blank entries in the log.
  
  
• Purchases by Purchase Type Code Analysis report, when reporting a line from an Invoice or Credit Note Receipt (ie. as opposed to a full Invoice or Credit Note), it would print the Purchase Analysis code description. It now prints notes, or a P/O reference, or the Invoice or Credit Note description instead, which is more useful.
  
  
• Invoices, Credit Notes and Debit Notes now have an option to display the goods/services and tax amounts processed in a Sales Tax/VAT period end. This may be useful if you are working on a cash accounting basis for the purposes of Sales Tax/VAT. The button for this option is in the 'Details' tab, next to the Sales Tax/VAT period end date. (not available when running the accounts system in 'basic' mode)
  
  
• List Deleted Transactions option now has the facility to undelete A/c Payable (Purchase Ledger) transactions. Also, A/c Receivable (Sales Ledger) could only undelete invoices, credit notes and debit notes, now it can undelete any transaction (except Contra's).
  
  
• Labels, it is now possible to set a value (in lines) for an offset from the top of a page to the first line to be printed. In the days when labels were produced on dot matrix printers this was no an issue, but as most labels are now printed on inkjet or laser printers, controlling the position of the first line is necessary.
  
  
• In the General Stock report, the data fields 'Cost Price' and 'Cost Price Each' were both producing the same figures. Which is an average cost price based on total quantity in stock divided by the cost of that stock. These have now been changed to 'Cost Price (LIST)' which produces the cost price as it appears in the stock item details record (ie. the 'LIST' cost price), and 'Average Cost Price' which produces the average cost as discussed above.
  
  
• When editing Proforma Invoices or Estimates, the quantity in stock displayed when cursoring over an item would not be correct. Fixed.
  
  
• List Deleted Transactions, if the 'Clear Transactions' button was used to clear out all the deleted transactions, they would all be cleared, but only the list on display would clear. If the user clicked any of the other lists, the transactions would still be displayed, even though they no longer existed. Fixed.
  
  
• Making or receiving payments in a none ledger currency into supplier or customer accounts would sometimes mix the ledger and none ledger currencies. Particularly if the currency to be used was edited. Fixed.
  
  
• Stock Control/Inventory, the Delivery Note details when displayed did not display the suppliers account code and name. Fixed.
  
  
• Sales Invoice, when a cost was added manually, some of the details did not line up properly with other automatically generated costs (although the data was processed correctly). Fixed.
  
  
• Database - Fixing option for Stock Control/Inventory, if costing was set to AVCO (Average Cost), it would not correctly re-calculate the total cost of the holding each stock item. Fixed.
  
  
• If using a Sales Tax/VAT cash accounting scheme for purchases, where an invoice falls within the tax period and payment is made after the tax period and is paid via a remittance advice, the invoice could be included in the Sales Tax/VAT period end. Even though it shouldn't appear until the following period end due to the date of the payment. Fixed.
  
  
• If using a Sales Tax/VAT cash accounting scheme for sales or purchases, where an invoice is part paid within a sales tax/VAT period, and then paid again after the sales tax/VAT period end, the proportion paid during the period may not appear in that period, appearing in the subsequent period instead. Fixed.
  
  

v4.200 14th January 2020

• Stock Control / Inventory, stock item details (wide window only), the stock movements now include separate columns for price and cost, and also include a running total for the quantity in stock.
  
  
• General Stock Report cleaned up a little, plus the included stock movements now has separate columns for item price and cost.
  
  
• It's now possible to add default file attachments to any documents that are emailed. Very useful for automatically including things like your 'Terms and Conditions' or 'Guarantee' or 'Returns Policy', etc. The option is in: Setup -> Miscellaneous -> Setup Email Document Attachments
  
  
• There is now an option to open the files (.DBF tables) directly using what ever application your Windows is set to open up .DBF files by default. The option is in the 'system' menu, I'm afraid it is not available when the software is used as shareware.
  
  
• Aged Debtors and Aged Creditors reports now have an option to filter out any transactions that are in dispute. Note, this option is not available in the on-screen debtors and creditors lists.
  
  
• United Kingdom only: when using a spreadsheet to produce the figures for MTD VAT returns, if the accounts system could not read numeric data from the cells in a spreadsheet, it could produce a VAT return with no figures in it. Now it displays a message warning the user if anything went wrong reading the VAT data from the spreadsheet.
  
  
• It is now possible to change the base currency of a company/organization. From the top menu bar select Setup -> Miscellaneous -> Currencies. Select the currency you wish to use and click the 'Set to Base Currency' button. Few users will require this option, but it's very useful for those that do require it.
  
  
• United Kingdom only, when setting up a VAT code for reverse charging, it would still allow a normal VAT rate to also be applied to the same VAT code. This confused the output of the VAT100 report. The ability for this to happen has been removed, so a VAT code can contain either a normal VAT rate or a reverse charging rate, but not both.
  
  
• General Ledger (Nominal Ledger), the 'List Journals' option has a 'Print List (Wide)' button, which is supposed to print the list as if the window had been dragged wide to expose the 'Description', 'Journal', 'Dept', and 'Currency' columns. The last three columns didn't get printed. Fixed.
  
  
• Cost of stock items, the 'LAST' costing method didn't work properly, often producing a cost of zero. Most users use FIFO, but if there is no cost available under FIFO it should attempt to retrieve a cost using LAST, But this usually failed, and so it would revert to using LIST. Which was a problem if no LIST cost price had been set up. Fixed.
  
  
• The Cash/Bank/Credit Card account statement displays an opening balance. But when the 'Run Report' option was selected at the bottom of the list, an opening balance wasn't printed. Fixed.
  
  
• Purchase Orders, when editing notes at the end of a Purchase Order that was already 'On order', or adding them to the end of a Purchase Order, the edits would not be saved. Fixed.
  
  

v4.199 26th November 2019

• When entering stock adjustments, you can now enter a date for the adjustment. Also, you can set it up (in Inventory/Sock Control setup Defaults and Variables option) to accept authorization for the adjustment. In which case an employee ID has to be entered.
  
  
• Employee details, it's now possible to change an employees reference. With the employee details displayed, click the 'Chge' button to the right hand side of the 'Find' button, and enter the new reference.
  
  
• In A/c Receivable (Sales Ledger), the 'All Transactions' option in the 'Lists' section of the drop down menu can now display a 'Cost' column. Drag the window wider to see this.
  
  
• In A/c Receivable (Sales Ledger) printing a receipt for payment in HTML or in ASCII text (using the 'Clipboard' or 'Text File' options) would print the payment amount as a negative figure. Fixed. Also, the 'Our Ref.' field in the print and ASCII text versions has been changed to 'Reference' and now prints out the actual reference and description, followed by the unique transaction number in brackets.
  
  
• Purchase Orders, under certain circumstances the suppliers unit of issue and the item bin locations were not always saved, or sometimes just saved for the first twelve items. Fixed.
  
  
• United Kingdom only: The reverse VAT charge scheme for purchases of services from the EU did not put a VAT figure into box 4 of the VAT 100 report. Fixed.
  
  

v4.198 13th November 2019

• There is a new option to import sales transactions. It's purpose is to import either paid or unpaid receipts from a POS system. Although it would of course handle files from other software. Multiple records in the imported data can be used to build up Invoices or Advice Notes with multiple lines. The option is called 'Import Transactions', and can be found in the 'New Transactions' section of the 'A/c Receivable' or 'Sales Ledger' menu.
  
  
• The Daybook report for both customer and supplier transactions now has an option to print only transactions with no balance outstanding.
  
  
• UK only, MTD VAT, if the option 'List VAT data held by HMRC' was run while in TEST mode, the test data would remain visible even after the system was switched to live mode. Fixed.
  
  
• UK only, CIS Returns, the send button remained greyed out when not in TEST mode. Fixed.
  
  
• The aged debtors and creditors reports, printed figures in 30 day columns when set to print by calendar month, and in calendar month columns when set to print by 30 days. Fixed.
  
  
• If a General Ledger (Nominal Ledger) account was changed to a cash book account, the cash balance would be 0.00, even if there was a debit or credit balance showing on the account. Fixed.
  
  
• When creating a sales Invoice from Advice Notes, not all Advice Notes would end up as part of the Invoice. If there were several Advice Notes, it would often take several Invoices to cover them all. Fixed.
  
  

v4.196 11th September 2019

• In a few places, the word 'Pence' was always used to refer to monetary figures to the right hand side of the decimal point (which would usually be coins), regardless of the currency in use. This has now been changed to reflect the actual currency in use.
  
  
• UK only, the option 'List data held by HMRC' now saves the data it downloads from HMRC's servers. So if you don't need to re-download each time you want to look at the data, except to update it of course.
  
  
• UK only, in the Value Added Tax Period End option, it claimed there was no VAT registration number, and the 'Send VAT100 to HMRC' button remained greyed out, even after printing the Full Report. This was due to a bug in v4.195. Fixed.
  
  

v4.195 6th September 2019

• General Ledger (Nominal Ledger) now has it's own Sales Tax/VAT analysis report. This lists any transactions subject to tax manually entered directly into the ledger within a given date range.
  
  
• Customer Proforma Invoices and Estimates can now be cancelled. This doesn't delete them, just sets their status to 'Cancelled', so you know to ignore them. They can be un-cancelled at any time. Useful if you create a new Proforma or Estimate that replaces a previous one.
  
  
• United Kingdom only: The Domestic Reverse Charge is now implemented. This is based on using a VAT code (you will need to set up) when entering purchase invoices that does not apply VAT to the invoice, but does add it to boxes 1 and 4 in your VAT 100 return.
  
  
• United Kingdom only: When submitting a VAT return, if there is more than one open VAT return available, and Adminsoft Accounts is not sure which one to use, it will display them in a list for the user to select.
  
  
• When an email was sent from customer or supplier account details, from the 'Email Contact' button next to the list of contacts. It would not record the email against the account. So if you then clicked the 'List Emails' button in the account details, the email would not be visible. Fixed.
  
  
• When sending a Purchase Order via email, two email windows would appear. Fixed.
  
  
• United Kingdom only: Submitting VAT 100 figures to HMRC, the software would allow dashes to be sent as part of the VAT registration number, if that's how the registration number was entered by the user. Which HMRC would reject. Fixed. If present, these are now automatically stripped out.
  
  
• AutoManager, when working on an invoice created from the Service Counter, it could display messages saying there is not enough stock when the stock is booked out. Fixed.
  
  
• Backup Data option would sometimes display an unnecessary message saying 'No folder selected?'. Fixed.
  
  
• In customer details, when listing Proforma Invoices, Advice Notes or Estimates, the column 'Ref' displayed a number instead of the identity of the sales representative. Fixed.
  
  
• When editing a customer or supplier transaction, if the account code was edited, the balances on the original account or the new account would not always reflect the fact the transaction hade been effectively moved from one to the other. Fixed.
  
  
• AutoManager, in Job Details when finishing a task, other tasks could appear in the Finish Task option at random. Fixed. Although it will not correct previous issues.
  
  

v4.194 6th August 2019

• There is a new option to list aged invoices in both ledgers. This will list invoices only, and in the order in which they are due for payment.
  
  
• The Aged Creditors and Aged Debtors, both display and report options, can now produce the information by account period, as well as the 30 day and calendar month periods previously available.
  
  
• In the Defaults and Variables option in the Miscellaneous menu in Setup, there is a new tab called 'Networking'. This contains very useful information if you are running Adminsoft Accounts as a multi-user system over a network. It also checks the Windows registry for key values that need to be set to zero. If you are networking your software, please visit this option.
  
  
• The Stock Movements List now includes the price/cost each and total price/cost. You will have to drag the window wider to see this extra information, or click the small green arrow.
  
  
• The general list of supercessions in Stock Control now has an option to delete a supercession.
  
  
• The user defined tool bar now has some extra options, including Stock Received, Stock Returned, Create P/O, and Cash Up for both Parts Counter and Shop/Cafe Manager.
  
  
• When backing up, the software now makes more checks to ensure the destination location exists, and if backing up to a ZIP file, the file name provided is a valid name.
  
  
• The Send Stock Back to Supplier option did not automatically fill in the cost of the stock item being returned. However, it now automatically fills in the current cost. Assuming that items being returned are likely to be the last items received.
  
  
• Asset Register, it's now possible to link the purchase invoice for the asset to the asset, and also the sales invoice if/when the asset is sold. This is done in the asset details window.
  
  
• Shop/Cafe Manager, when paying a receipt, there is now an option to charge the receipt to a customer account instead.
  
  
• UK only: making MTD VAT submissions using a spreadsheet has been improved. Some quirks in the software have been ironed out. Hopefully, the facility is now a little easier to use.
  
  
• Software would not accept email addresses where the domain name started with a number. Fixed.
  
  
• When creating a Sales Invoice with stock items, the software would sometimes display a message telling the user they were selling an item below cost, when in fact they were not. Fixed.
  
  
• Inventory/Stock Control, List Estimated Items option would not print the list at all. Fixed.
  
  
• The Receive Stock from Supplier and Send Stock Back to Supplier options, when a stock code was entered manually that was a supercession, the software did not automatically display the stock item details the stock code was superceeded to. Fixed.
  
  
• When sending an email, the default font used was Times New Roman, although the font selector was set to to use Arial. Fixed. The default font in the body of the email is now Arial.
  
  
• When changing the actual code of a Sales Analysis code, the Sales Analysis codes in the costs file for sales invoices did not get updated. When would mean if using COGS, they would not post correctly if the invoice was subsequently edited or copied. Fixed.
  
  
• Shop/Cafe Manager, refunding just part of a receipt often did not work correctly. Fixed.
  
  
• In Sales Invoices, Credit Notes, Estimates, Pro-Forma's, and Advice Notes, when you cursored over a stock item in the document, the quantity available in stock that displayed below was wrong, as it added the current quantity in the document to the actual quantity available. Fixed.
  
  
• Inventory/Stock Control, the options 'List Supercessions' and List Archived Items' could not print the list, only the list header would appear. Fixed.
  
  
• In Stock Item Details, listing Estimates and Proforma Invoices for the item would sometimes display the wrong item price. Fixed.
  
  
• Clicking the 'Help' button from a 'find' window (searching for an account, stock item, etc.) could sometimes cause the application to freeze. Though it could usually be unfrozen by selecting 'Exit' on the top menu bar. Fixed.
  
  
• When entering a password on Adminsoft Accounts start up, if the password entered was too long, but the initial characters matched the password, it would be accepted. Fixed.
  
  

v4.193 4th June 2019

• When allocating a transaction, the date used was always 'todays' date. Though this can be edited. This now defaults to the transaction date (as in the transaction being allocated). This change in the default date makes a lot more sense for those using a Sales Tax/VAT Cash Accounting Scheme. The date can still be edited, and the user can now change that default to 'todays' date instead, if they wish.
  
  
• Purchase Orders, if a P/O that's 'On order' is received by accident, it can now be reversed. In the P/O details window, there is now a 'Reverse Order Received' button that will pull all items back out of stock, and set the P/O status back to 'On order'.
  
  
• AutoManager, the ability to give discounts and edit the retail price of items sold through Parts Counter can now be disabled in the 'Defaults and Variables' option in AutoManager setup.
  
  
• When emailing Sales Invoices, users can now select what they would like to appear in the email subject by default.
  
  
• In the customer details window, the maximum number of Advice Notes, Estimates and Proforma Invoices that can be displayed has now increased from 1,000 to 10,000
  
  
• Stock Take report, did not align data fields with columns properly when output to a spreadsheet. Fixed.
  
  
• Nominal Ledger/General Ledger, when look at asset details in the asset register, or details of recurring transactions, if the user selected the option to list all associated transactions, any deleted transactions would appear in the list. This includes edited transactions (as they get deleted and then re-posted). Making it appear the same transactions have been posted twice, or more. Fixed.
  
  
• Data Integrity Check was listing Sales Invoices that never had any costs, saying the costs didn't balance. Fixed.
  
  
• Data Fixing, when correcting stock data, it would not clear down the total item cost if there were no stock movement records. It also did not correct the 'Purch Orders' figure in the stock item details. Fixed.
  
  
• When backing up to a ZIP file, the software could sometimes put a backslash ("\") in front of the the file name. Which would cause the backup to fail. Fixed.
  
  
• When setting up a till, if the user entered an opening balance right away, ie. before saving details of the till being set up, the software would lose track of the balance. Fixed.
  
  
• When cashing up for the first time, if no opening balance had been set up, the software would ask the user if they wanted to enter an opening balance. If they selected 'Yes' the window asking for the opening balance would appear behind the cash up window, and so users wouldn't see it. Fixed.
  
  
• AutoManager, Parts Counter was not storing the till number of the PC from which a sale was made. So when cashing up, all sales would be added together. Fixed.
  
  

v4.192 2nd May 2019

• The software would not create a new company/organization for users based in United States, Canada, Australia, or New Zealand!!! Fixed.
  
  

v4.191 27th April 2019

• The 'When not enough stock' and 'When stock is low' settings in Stock Control (Inventory) now apply to the Shop/Cafe Manager module. Previously they only applied to AutoManager and regular sales invoices.
  
  
• In Shop/Cafe manager, Sales Counter, you can now right click on a receipt or stock list to bring up the full stock item details.
  
  
• In Shop/Cafe manager, Sales Counter uses text that is larger than standard text to make it easier to read in a POS environment. However, the message windows that would appear from time to time used the standard size text. These now look very different, and also use larger text.
  
  
• The 'Payment - Single' and 'Receipt - Single' options, when selected from a cash/bank statement would automatically select the cash/bank account. But the 'OK' button would remain greyed out unless the selection was confirmed manually. Fixed.
  
  
• All of the 'Payment' and 'Receipt' options called from the General Ledger (Nominal Ledger) would keep the 'OK' button greyed out if the forms lost focus and then regained it. Fixed.
  
  
• In the Shop/Cafe Manager, if the Sales Counter option was selected and the user clicked 'Logout' to prevent anyone from using the system without logging in, if anyone clicked the X in the top right hand corner of the Sales Counter window, it would close. Leaving the application frozen. Fixed.
  
  

v4.190 23rd April 2019

• The 'Money Received' and 'Money Paid Out' options (single and multi) in the General Ledger (Nominal Ledger) have been improved. It is now possible to enter the account code into the input field, and the account will be selected. If the account code is not known, the small arrow head on the right hand side can be clicked to view a list. The list is now larger than it used to be, and is also scrollable with the mouse wheel.
  
  
• When adding a password to an Adminsoft Accounts user, you can now also add a security question that can be used to gain access if the user forgets their password.
  
  
• Sales Invoices, there are now buttons on the right hand side to move an invoice line up or down the invoice. Note: this option is only available when the application has sufficient width (min. 1,000 pixels) to display the wide format invoice, and is running in Advanced Mode (the default).
  
  
• United Kingdom only: option added to VAT codes to automatically handle reverse charging on the purchase of services from VAT registered businesses in the EU. Existing users will have to click the 'Reverse charge for purchase of services from EU' option for the required VAT code.
  
  
• United Kingdom only: option added to Nominal Ledger Defaults and Variables option to force Adminsoft Accounts to re-authorise it's access when it next attempts to read or write VAT data to HMRC's server.
  
  
• Nominal Ledger (General Ledger), Statement of Income Report (Profit & Loss), when selected for a range of periods within the financial year, they did not total correctly in the right hand side column. Fixed.
  
  
• United Kingdom only, in the Payroll the PAYE Calculator was not accepting Scottish or Welsh tax codes. Fixed.
  
  
• AutoManager, the Service Counter did not create sales invoices when the accounts system was running in 'Basic' mode. Fixed.
  
  
• Proforma Invoices to customers would not print a Delivery Note. Fixed.
  
  
• When creating an Estimate for a customer, the Print Delivery Note button was enabled, even though it could not be selected. Fixed.
  
  
• Recurring Transactions in the General Ledger (Nominal Ledger) may not work properly after the feature was enhanced in the last update. The input field 'total number of transactions' that can limit the total number of posting made can end up with an erroneous value. Fixed. You will need to manually edit this input field to correct it if your recurring transactions are not making as many postings as they should.
  
  
• The 'Money Received (Single)' and 'Money Paid Out (Single)' options in the General Ledger (Nominal Ledger) did not work if the business/organization was not registered for Sales Tax/VAT. Fixed.
  
  
• Standing Transactions in the General Ledger (Nominal Ledger) were not recording the last transaction posted date. Fixed.
  
  
• When creating a new company/organization, if copying the data from another existing company/organization it would not copy the document layouts, it would also display an error message. Fixed.
  
  

v4.189 21st March 2019

• United Kingdom, Payroll prepared for 2019-20 tax year. This includes full implementation of Scottish and Welsh tax codes. Plus the introduction of Post Graduate Loan deductions.
  
  
• United Kingdom, in the Payroll option, the 'List EPS Submissions' would list the submissions. But when an EPS submission was selected to view the details, it displayed the transmission details of an unrelated submission. Fixed.
  
  
• Most input fields that accept email addresses try to validate the email address. If the address is considered to be most likely invalid, the background of the input field will be pink. If the user knows the address is actually correct, they can now right click in the input field and add the email address to a list of email addresses (an 'exceptions' list) that will no longer be validated.
  
  
• The email shot options for both customers and suppliers, now have an option to output the list as displayed, and also to output the email addresses only to Excel and OpenOffice spreadsheets and various file formats (as per report output).
  
  
• General Ledger (Nominal Ledger) transactions now have options to copy a transaction and to reverse a transaction. These extra buttons appear in several locations where transactions or journals are being listed.
  
  
• None ISO 4217 currency codes can now be used if required. This allows crypto currencies to be used.
  
  
• When importing Stock Item data, using the 'Import Data from Supplier' option in the Inventory/Stock Control menu, you can now specify the character that can be used to delimit string data fields. These are usually " or '. But if your file uses a different character, you can now specify it. However, if the file to be imported uses the standard , or TAB as data field delimiters and " or ' as the string delimiters, it can now import a lot faster.
  
  
• When importing Stock Item data, using the 'Import Data from Supplier' option in the Inventory/Stock Control menu, if the imported data contains an item that superceeds to an item that already superceeds to another item, the imported item will superceed to the item pointed to by that item. ie. it will not point to another supersession, but direct to the 'live' item. As supercessions can not exist as chains. Any supersession must point to a live item.
  
  
• When importing Stock Item data, using the 'Import Data from Supplier' option in the Inventory/Stock Control menu, if the imported data contains an item that superceeds to an item that does not exist, a new item will be created and the imported item superceeded to it.
  
  
• There is now an option to remove old backups. This can be found in Setup -> System -> List/Maintain Backups.
  
  
• Both recurring journals and standing journals can now handle up to 999 journal entries per batch. They also allow the input of Sales Tax/VAT.
  
  
• AutoManager, in Service Counter when a stock item was added to the job, and the cost was edited in the 'Add Part' option, the edited cost was ignored. Fixed.
  
  
• Payroll, in the Pay Input Employee Pay slip Details form, the 'Remove' button in the Additions/Deductions section did not always remove the addition/deduction correctly. Fixed.
  
  
• When importing sales or purchase transactions that contain payments, the payment type code used was defaulting to 'CHQ' (or 'CHK' depending on your country). It was not using the default payment account as described in the Help text. Fixed. (it now uses the default set up in each ledger)
  
  
• Report output to CSV files stopped working. It produced the data fields, but they were all empty. Fixed.
  
  

v4.188 14th February 2019

• Stock, import data from supplier option: prefix's can now be entered for supercessions and alternative stock item SKU's. If no prefix is entered, the fields containing the SKU's for these items in the data file must contain the full SKU including any prefix.
  
  
• The list of Purchase Orders can now be dragged wider to expose further information about each Purchase Order, including total weight, solvent, and purchase invoice status.
  
  
• Button 'Invoice Status' added to the list of Purchase Orders. This allows you to view which items on the P/O have been on a supplier invoice, and to edit as required.
  
  
• Asset details, it's now possible to edit the depreciation figures. Changes to these plus some other figures in the asset details will be recorded, and can be viewed from the asset details at any time.
  
  
• Sales Tax/VAT information has been added in to several places where General Ledger (Nominal Ledger) journals are listed.
  
  
• The images button in the window that lists all the Nominal Ledger (General Ledger) postings that have been automatically applied when a sales or purchase transaction has been created did not always display the correct details for the transaction. Fixed.
  
  
• Payroll: for the United Kingdom, only the small payslip layout worked. For rest of world, all the pay slip layouts had stopped working. Fixed.
  
  

v4.187 5th February 2019

• UK only: Making Tax Digital for VAT is now implemented. Until 1st April'19, most businesses will only be able to try it out in TEST mode. But it's ready to go live when you are.
  
  
• UK only: the VAT Flat Rate Scheme is now an option. This allows the accounts system to automatically calculate your VAT return figures when using this scheme (necessary under MTD).
  
  
• The Customer list and Supplier list options now include a facility for locating the customer or supplier account by account code or account name. Just the first letter/number or few letters/numbers are required, the list will reposition itself as you type in the characters.
  
  
• When entering a Sales Invoice, if invoicing from stock and the sales price is below the cost price, a message will now appear warning the user they are making a loss. This function can be disabled if not required in the Defaults and Variables option for A/c Receivable (Sales Ledger).
  
  
• In the General Stock Report, bar code is now one of the optional fields that can be printed.
  
  
• New report: Payment Terms Analysis added to A/c Receivable (Sales Ledger).
  
  
• The graphs that display the average number of days outstanding for invoices, for one customer or all customers, now has an option to show the number of days overdue instead.
  
  
• When backing up to a ZIP file, the software now automatically adds the current date to the file name of the ZIP file. To ensure it does not overwrite backups from previous days.
  
  
• In the General Ledger (Nominal Ledger), the Account Activity report now includes an option for printing a 145 column report width. This width will include any customer or supplier names that relate to the journal.
  
  
• Extra option has been added into the menu's for customers, suppliers and employees that lists all their diary entries.
  
  
• Purchase Order layouts, both print/PDF and HTML, now include the suppliers Unit of Issue (ie. the item has to be purchased in lots of) and the stock item bin locations.
  
  
• Payroll - Pay Input option, when the 'Pay All Employees' option is selected, and the report output to a spreadsheet, the figures would not appear in the correct columns. Fixed.
  
  
• If a user previewed a document such as a Sales Invoice or Purchase Order, etc., and while viewing the preview moved the mouse cursor over a list in a form in the background, the application could sometimes get stuck. Although it hadn't crashed, the only way out was often to end the application via Windows Task Manager. Fixed.
  
  
• If a user was restricted to 'View Only' for Stock Control/Inventory, they were still allowed to remove a supplier from the list of suppliers for a stock item. Fixed.
  
  
• If a Software Registration Key was purchased and entered into the accounts system, in the document layouts that can not be edited (such as pay slips), the Adminsoft advert continued to appear. When it should have been automatically removed. Fixed.
  
  
• Parts Counter, if a customer had a discount band that was a markup on cost, any special prices set as discounts did not work out the selling price correctly. Fixed.
  
  
• The cursor bar in graphs for payments and sales/profit would not move into the far right hand column. Thus transactions that made up the line or bar in that column could not be listed. Fixed.
  
  
• Purchase Orders would not work if the layout was edited to include the data items: ItemSolvent, ItemWeight, or ItemUnit. Fixed.
  
  

v4.184 10th October 2018

• Events can now be added into the employee planner, as well as holidays/closure dates.
  
  
• When entering a Sales Invoice or Credit Note, and you are registered for Sales Tax/VAT, the software would allow you to right click on a price (the 'Each' column) more than once, reducing the value each time as it stripped out the Sales Tax/VAT from the figure. It will now only allow the price to be right clicked once, unless it's been edited.
  
  
• A new option has been added to manage images. Click on Setup -> System -> Manage (and move) Image Files.
  
  
• Payroll, when printing payslips there is now an option to select a different printer or output to a PDF file.
  
  
• Payroll, United Kingdom only, the pay calculator has been improved so it's not always in front of other windows, and it also now accepts pay period and a pay to day inputs.
  
  
• Payroll, United Kingdom only, employee NI references are now validated, to ensure the format is as per HMRC specifications. This reduces the risk of an FPS submission failing.
  
  
• Customer delivery addresses now appear in delivery address name order.
  
  
• Stock/Inventory Control, notes can now be added in the 'Receive Stock from Supplier' and 'Send Stock Back to Supplier' options. The notes can then be viewed when looking at the delivery note details.
  
  
• AutoManager and Shop/Cafe Manager, in each set up it is now possible to select whether receipts always print the quantity, never print the quantity, or only print the quantity when in excess of a certain number of units are being sold (if it's not printing the quantity, it prints a separate line for each unit).
  
  
• General/Nominal Ledger, document files (including images) can now be attached to accounts. Useful for recording things like bank/card/mortgage statements, tax demands, etc.
  
  
• Shop/Cafe Manager, when using 32 column width receipts, the 'Print Bill' option which just prints a copy of the bill without completing the sale, would not print items correctly where the quantity was greater than 3. Fixed.
  
  
• When using large font ('Help -> Change Form and Font Sizes' option) the buttons vanished off the bottom of supplier Adjustment transactions. Fixed
  
  
• If there are two or more tax rates (eg. federal sales tax, county sales tax, city, and so on), the Adjustment and Write Off transactions for suppliers would contain input fields for some of the tax bands even when set up not to do so. Fixed.
  
  
• Statement of Financial Position (Balance Sheet) report would not accept a financial year longer than a calendar year unless the current year was longer than a financial year. Fixed.
  
  

v4.183 3rd July 2018

• Purchase Order Processing: A new option has been added to the menu 'List Stock Items on Order', which does exactly that. Although there is a report producing this information, the list may be more convenient to use.
  
  
• Purchase Invoices/Credit Notes: it is now possible to set up so that when the 'Post' button is clicked, and the transaction has been posted, the form clears (including the selected a/c) ready for a completely new Invoice/Credit Note. Note, you can mix document types, the new transaction must be the same type of transaction just posted. Option to switch this facility on is in the the A'c Payable (Purchase Ledger) Defaults and Variables option in the set up menu.
  
  
• If you are registered for Sales Tax/VAT, when entering customer or supplier invoices, and you have a price that is inclusive of Sales tax/VAT, you can enter that price 'as is', and then right click in the price 'Each' input field. The Sales Tax/VAT will be automatically removed from the price. Saves time fiddling around with a calculator.
  
  
• Email system now supports Transport Layer Security (TLS). This is required by an increasing number of SMTP servers.
  
  
• Labels can now be printed one at a time. Previously it would only allow a minimum of two per 'page'. Which meant if you print labels off a roll, one would be wasted each time only one label was required.
  
  
• Payroll, if each employee was paid individually, using the 'Pay Single Employee' button, the payroll would not be flagged as 'Processed' until the 'Pay All Employees' button was clicked, even if there were no more employees to actually pay. Fixed.
• The 'Supplier search' option would produce erroneous results, unless 'Main accounts' was deselected. Fixed.
  
  
• Stock/Inventory Control, in Stock Item Details, if a stock level adjustment was entered, and it required postings to the General Ledger (Nominal Ledger), the postings would be wrong if reducing the stock, as the debit and credit would be a negative value. Fixed.
  
  

v4.182 6th June 2018

• The Profit & Loss and Balance Sheet reports both now have two column versions available (based on the traditional format).
  
  
• Option added to stock control to allow software to warn users in he event a stock item falls to or below th re-order level or minimum quantity level, selectable in 'Defaults and Variables'.
  
  
• Reports added into the 'Miscellaneous Reports' option for both customers and suppliers that allow a list of accounts to be produced based on a specified amount of activity over a given period. Usefully, this option also allows you to produce a list of customers with no sales over any given period.
  
  
• A new menu item can be added to the top menu bar, allowing you to list documents such as Employee Handbook, Health and Safety Policy, etc. The option to do this is in Setup -> Miscellaneous.
  
  
• An option has been added to some setup options such as departments, currencies, etc. that allow you to copy the list from another company/organization.
  
  
• AutoManager, Service Counter, you can now prevent the profit figure from being displayed in the Job Details screen. This is done via Setup -> AutoManager -> Defaults and Variables.
  
  
• Some lists could be scrolled using the mouse wheel as soon as the list appeared. But with some lists you had to click into the scroll bar on the left hand side before the mouse wheel would work. Now if a list doesn't scroll with the mouse wheel straight away, you can simply position the mouse cursor over the list in order to use the mouse wheel.
  
  
• Payments entered using the batch input option, when set to automatically allocate to invoices, would display those invoices as 'Quick Input' invoices. Fixed.
  
  
• Employee Details, the absence section did not total up the holiday, sick, etc correctly. Fixed.
  
  
• When some reports were output to a spreadsheet, the date appeared to the right of the page number instead of the left. Fixed.
  
  
• The Aged Creditor and Aged Debtor reports based on a previous date (as opposed to the usual as of today), would not work for suppliers or customers that had in excess of 1,000 transactions. Fixed.
  
  
• The printer settings on some PC's when edited could not be retrieved. This issue turned out to be due to PC/network names that were over 30 characters. Fixed.
  
  
• When entering stock items into a sales invoice, if the item contained a surcharge, the quantity deducted from the quantity in stock would get doubled up. Fixed.
  
  

v4.180 1st May 2018

• Users can now be setup to use different email addresses for different companies/organizations. This is done in the 'Email' tab in the 'User Maintenance' option.
  
  
• Sales Tax/VAT registration number has been added to the far right hand side of the 'All Transactions' option found in the 'Lists' section of both customer and supplier menus. The form has to be dragged wider to see the extra information.
  
  
• The Daybook report for both customers and suppliers now has the option to include the customers/suppliers Sales Tax/VAT registration number.
  
  
• When the software is installed in India, the GST/VAT tax table should now be complete and may not require any modification before use. Always check it first though.
  
  
• The miscellaneous reports option for both customers and suppliers have been updated. Also a new report has been added that produces a list of customers/supplers by Sales/Purchase order type, in value order. So you can see who is buying what from you, and from who and what you are purchasing.
  
  
• For users in India, the Sales Analysis report now includes HSN/SAC codes (if they have been entered into the Sales Analsys codes). This report is available via the usual 'Miscellaneous Reports' option as well as directly from the 'Reports' section of the menu.
  
  
• It was possible for users to enter invalid dates into sales or purchase invoices, and although there would be a warning message, the invoice could still be posted. Now the invoice can not be posted if the date is invalid.
  
  
• Payroll: there is now an option to unprocess an employees payslip, provided it has not been paid. The option is in the 'Pay Input' form.
  
  
• United Kingdom: you now have the option of editing the figures in the VAT100 before submitting it to HMRC.
  
  
• The Help menu has two extra options. As well as the options for saving and printing screen and form images, you can now also open a screen or form image in your Windows default image viewer (usually Windows Photo Viewer).
  
  
• The default holiday year runs from 1st Jan. to 31st Dec. If this is adjusted, depending on the dates the start and finish are adjusted to, the employees details may not display their holidays taken for all years. Fixed.
  
  
• When entering a refund from a supplier, unless the refund was not in the ledger currency, the 'OK' button would remain greyed out. Preventing the refund from being posted. Fixed.
  
  
• Payroll: if a deduction/addition was added to the employees payslip in the 'Employee/Payslip Details' option, if the deduction/addition was calculated using a percentage, any lower of upper bands associated with it were not included, and so not taken into account in the calculations. Fixed.
  
  
• Payroll: in the 'Employee/Payslip Details' option, if a deduction/addition that was based on a percentage was selected, the 'Remove' button would remain greyed out. Fixed.
  
  
• Payroll: in the 'Employee Details' option, in the 'Pay Details' tab, if a deduction/addition was selected that was a percentage, it would allow the user to enter a figure. Though the figure was never used, as it should not be possible to edit a percentage based deduction/addition in the employee details option. Which was misleading. Fixed.
  
  
• United Kingdom, Payroll, if an employee had a student loan deduction, the FPS submission to HMRC would fail. Fixed.
  
  
• Inventory/Stock Control, the Sales Commission report did not work properly. Fixed.
  
  
• When printing a list, unlike reports, the output selection for a list was not subject to any output type restrictions that may have been setup for the user. Fixed.
  
  

v4.179 11th April 2018

• UK only: EC Sales List submissions were being rejected by HMRC due to spaces in the senders post code in the XML file. It would send literally whatever was typed in as the post code, including any spaces in the middle and/or at the end. Fixed.
  
  
• The Data Integrity Check could sometimes incorrectly report an issue with a General (Nominal) Ledger account when checking the integrity for the current year. Fixed.
  
  
• Stock Control/Inventory, when entering an adjustment to reduce the stock holding, the 'Assumed cost' and 'Cost per' input fields would be automatically filled in (with the wrong figures) and then be greyed out preventing any user input to correct. Fixed.
  
  
• PartsCounter in the AutoManager module would display a message saying a part was out of stock when it was not controlled (and therefore the stock level was zero). Fixed.
  
  
• When a stock item had the input field 'Controlled' set to 'N', the quantity in stock was still updated when the stock item was sold. Fixed.
  
  
• When creating some transactions such as adjustments, payments, etc. for customers and suppliers, the software would allow a transaction with a value of 0.00 to be posted. Fixed.
  
  

v4.178 30th March 2018

• Sales and Purchase Analysis codes can now be set up with a default Sales Tax/VAT that is used when entering invoices if the item is not a stock item and there is no default on the account.
  
  
• The loan calculator did not calculate the number of repayment periods correctly when presented with the loan amount, interest, and monthly payment required. Fixed.
  
  
• When entering a Purchase Invoice, if a P/O was used to populate the body of the invoice and one or more of the lines in the P/O was for comment or extra description, a message would popup for each line saying the "Purchase Analysis code could not be found?". Fixed.
  
  
• When a Purchase Order has been created and placed on order, then further items are added to the order, when a Purchase Invoice is entered and the P/O selected, the prices of the additional items did not get copied over to the body of the invoice. Fixed.
  
  
• When a Purchase Order has been created and placed on order, then further items are added to the order, if the "All Items Received" button is clicked straight away, the added items did not get their 'Received' input field automatically completed. Fixed.
  
  
• ShopManager, when printing a receipt, if more than three of any one item was sold at once, it would list the price each on the receipt, instead of the total price for all the items. Although the total amount of the receipt was correct. Fixed.
  
  
• In supplier account details, if the 'Invoice Receipt' option was used, and no 'Amount' entered, just a tax code and figure for Sales Tax/VAT, it would make a posting for 0.00 to a purchase account in the General Ledger (Nominal Ledger). Fixed.
  
  
• Sales Tax/VAT period end when using the Cash Accounting scheme: Credit Notes were not appearing in the Tax Period End report. Fixed. (any missed out will appear in future reports)
  
  

v4.174 12th March 2018

• Sales Invoices and Credit Notes: there is now an option in setup to enable the editing of costs for invoices and credit notes that have already been posted (this will default to enabled).
  
  
• The Cash Flow Statement can now produce as report for a specific account period (previously it was YTD only).
  
  
• When print 'Kit Details' for a stock item, it now lists the bin locations of the stock item and it's constituent kit parts.
  
  
• United Kingdom only: Construction Industry Scheme subcontractor verification is now fully implemented.
  
  
• Human Resources, employee holiday/absence can now be entered in hours as well as days.
  
  
• Human Resources, holiday/absence years are now user definable. ie. not tied to a calendar year.
  
  
• United Kingdom only: the response message received back from HMRC during RTI, ECSL, VAT or CIS, is now formatted, to make it a little easier to read.
  
  
• Account Periods: the button to open/close a whole year at once had stopped working. Fixed.
  
  
• Stock Control: Delivery Notes in HTML format would keep popping up little messages as they were being output. This is code left over from a test, the messages should have been removed before going live! Fixed.
  
  
• When printing Purchase Orders, if the 'Authorized by' data field is used (appears as 'Our Representative' in the default Purchase Order layouts), instead of printing the name of the person it would print a number. Fixed.
  
  
• When backing up to a ZIP file, if the backup failed for any reason, a message would appear advising the user of this, but the "Creating ZIP file...." notice would remain on screen preventing the user from further operation of the accounts system. Fixed.
  
  
• United Kingdom only: when viewing an old purchase invoice that was subject to a CIS deduction, the CIS amount input field would be active and allow the content to be edited when the invoice wasn't being edited (though any change to the amount wouldn't be saved). Fixed.
  
  
• Stock Control/Inventory, when using the 'Import Data from Supplier' option, it would not cost opening stock quantities correctly where the cost was not for each individual unit (ie. using the 'cost per' field). Also, if a supplier account was selected, it would not be added to the stock items list of suppliers unless a data field specific to the supplier was being imported as well. Fixed.
  
  
• List Remittance Advices, if the 'Create Remittance' button was clicked, and instead of selecting an account the 'Cancel' button was then clicked, a new remittance advice form would appear anyway, with the first account in the ledger selected (based on account code). Fixed.
  
  
• AutoManager, Service Counter Job Details: when booking an item out, the message "Warning: there is not enough stock. Book part out anyway?" would sometimes appear, even though there was sufficient stock. Fixed.
  
  
• Nominal/General Ledger, Locate Transactions using a search of debit and credit balances, if any transactions had a debit and credit balance of 0.00, they would get listed regardless of the from/to amount range specified. Fixed.
  
  

v4.173 10th February 2018

• Default Sales Tax/VAT codes for new stock items are now optional. Though a Sales Tax/VAT code in a stock item itself is not optional, and will be 0 if no default is set up.
  
  
• The Aged Debtor and Aged Creditor reports now have an option for printing in wide format. This allows much larger numbers to be printed.
  
  
• Payroll, United Kingdom only, two extra payslip layouts have been added. Both print a large format payslip (ie. 2 per page), but one includes all hours worked, and the other includes the notes in the body of the payslip rather than below it.
  
  
• If the first account period in the list of account periods is the current period, the software can't locate it! Causing a message to appear saying there's no account period. Fixed.
  
  
• When scanning a document image, all seems to work fine until the last stage, when a message appears "File no longer exists". Fixed.
  
  
• When operating COGS, if the Trading Report was used (General/Nominal Ledger), the cost of goods would get double up, as they'd appear under 'Cost of Goods' as well as in the 'Expenses' section. Foxed. Any COGS accounts associated with a Sales Analysis code will not appear in the report.
  
  

v4.172 31st January 2018

• United Kingdom only: The Construction Industry Scheme (CIS) is now fully supported, for both contractors and subcontractors. There is a free 20 page downloadable user guide in the user guide section of our web site. Please check this out for details.
  
  
• Sales Tax/VAT Cash Accounting scheme: when using this scheme only invoices that have been paid will appear in the Sales Tax/VAT period end report. Previously, if an invoice was part paid, the whole invoice value would be reported. Now, only a proportion of the invoice will be reported, based on the amount paid. Care will need to be taken when you next run your Sales Tax/VAT period end, as all part paid invoices previously reported in full may re-appear with corrections.
  
  
• The option in Stock Control/Inventory setup that allows the user to say what should happen when raising a sales invoice with insufficient stock, operated across all parts of the system, except Service Counter in the AutoManager module. Service Counter is now included.
  
  
• The options to setup various codes usually have an option to change the code. But not all of them had this option. The 'change code' option has now been added to most codes, including General Ledger (Nominal Ledger) account report groups and cash flow groups, asset type codes, business type codes, till open reason codes, etc.
  
  
• In the supplier account details, the totals displayed for Purchase Orders no longer include orders that are not on order, or have been cancelled.
  
  
• It is now possible to delete a Purchase Order. This option must be enabled in the Purchase Order setup, and orders that have a status of part received or received can not be deleted.
  
  
• For users in the United Kingdom who use the payroll, tax and NI rates added for the new tax year 2018/19. If you're in Scotland, you will be required to make some manual adjustments to the rates. ALWAYS CHECK THEY ARE CORRECT BEFORE PROCESSING THE PAYROLL.
  
  
• AutoManager, the Parts Counter will now follow the instructions specified by the Stock Control system over what to do in the event there is insufficient available stock. The same as general sales invoices do.
  
  
• Images for transactions and stock items: the software can now handle PDF files. Although they can not be shown as thumbnails, so it displays a PDF logo instead.
  
  
• For users in India, stock item details now contain a field called HSN/SAC. Invoices do not automatically show this field, so you will need to edit your invoice layouts if you need to use it. Also, input of this field can be made mandatory, as can the GST registration numbers for customers and suppliers.
  
  
• The Trial Balance report, when printing 'For Year to Period End' did not have an option to print wide (the 'Wide Report Format' would be greyed out). The option to print wide is now available. So it can handle large numbers up to 999,999,999,999,999.99 for YTD balances, and 999,999,999,999.99 for transactions.
  
  
• United Kingdom payroll: now has the option of undoing the payment of employees. Provided an FPS has not been submitted to HMRC.
  
  
• Payroll, the employees name on the large format payslips was limited to 20 characters, even though there was space to print at least 27. Fixed.
  
  
• When selecting Adjustment, Payment, Refund, or Write Off after selecting a transaction in the customer or supplier account details option, it would base the transaction of the value of the selected transaction rather than the outstanding amount. Fixed.
  
  
• When a Proforma was converted into a Sales Invoice, it would not always calculate the payment due date correctly. Fixed.
  
  
• If the company/organization is not registered for Sales Tax/VAT, when entering purchase invoices in a batch, the button to list Purchase Analysis codes, lists Sales Analysis codes instead. Fixed.
  
  
• When entering a sales invoice, and the cursor was in the 'Details' input field, if you clicked into another input field (or onto one of the page tabs), you would have to click twice. Fixed.
  
  
• Asset Register, when postings were made using the 'Apply Regular Postings' option for any assets that had a scrap value and were depreciated using the 'Reducing Balance' method, the scrap value was posted as part of the depreciation in the first account period. Fixed.
  
  
• Document images for transactions: the software could sometimes get confused over which images it was supposed to be displaying. Fixed.
  
  
• EC Sales List: when a line in the sales list was edited, it could re-display some odd figures. Fixed.
  
  
• The stock search option, when searching 'Extra Description' only looked at the the first field rather than all four fields of the extra description. Fixed.
  
  
• Stock Item Details (the wider version of the form only), when supplier prices, or associated items, or alternative items, or supercessions, or special prices were updated, the lists did not automatically update straight when control returned back to the stock item details form. Fixed.
  
  
• The first window opened in the accounts system would sit slightly too far to the left. It's left edge would be outside of the application display area. Fixed.
  
  

v4.170 18th November 2017

• United Kingdom only: if you use the recently added option in Adminsoft Accounts to directly file your VAT100 or EC Sales List with HMRC, there were issues that caused the software to become confused as to whether it was in 'live' mode or 'test' mode. The meant it could make a live data submission when in test mode, and vice versa. This issue is now resolved. But if you have used either of these options, you will need to login to HMRC's web site and ensure your submissions are correct and up to date. If in any doubt at all, contact HMRC.
  
  
• Some users couldn't see the tabs at the bottom of the Adminsoft Accounts application window, and so were unable to change the background. There is now an option for changing the background at the bottom of the 'Help' menu.
  
  
• Customer Advice Notes, Proforma Invoices and Estimates can now be edited. There is an option in the setup Defaults and Variables option for A/c receivable/Sales Ledger that allows you to disable this feature if you wish. An Advice Note can not be edited if it has already been invoiced.
  
  
• Stock Item Details now contains a button that lists Estimates and Proforma Invoices generated from A/c Receivable ledger (Sales Ledger) for the select stock item.
  
  
• The 'Database - Re-index' option now checks to make sure no users are logged into the selected company/organization before it tries to re-index.
  
  
• There is now an option to re-index Adminsoft Accounts from the command line. There are several options, enter 'accounts help' into the command prompt to see what options are available. This new feature should be very useful to those running a network who would like to automatically re-index the accounts system over night.
  
  
• The HTML layout editor for Sales invoices, Estimates, Advice Notes, and Proforma's did not contain any data fields for handling whole document discounts (applied using the 'Disc' button). Fixed.
  
  
• Sales Invoices, if costs were changed the profit figure did not automatically update. Although it would update if the body of the invoice was edited, and when the invoice was posted. Fixed.
  
  
• Sales Invoices, if stock item cost was edited, the supplier find button was still enabled, even though the supplier account input field was not. Fixed.
  
  
• When setting up the background images (Setup -> Miscellaneous -> Set Background Images), if the payroll module was not selected, the Stock Control/Inventory background title would be called 'Human Resources'. Fixed.
  
  
• In one of the customer account details forms, if an invoice was selected, and then 'Payment Received' button clicked, the payments details form would not contain the correct information. Fixed.
  
  

v4.169 6th November 2017

• When using Adminsoft Accounts for free, it will now always default to displaying a sponsors web site when a company/organization is selected. This is an unashamed attempt to boost revenue, as not enough users purchase a Software Registration Key. I'm happy for people to use the software for free, but as they say, there's no such thing as a free lunch! Every time you get a quiet few minutes, please use the sponsors web site.
  
  
• International Payroll: printing the 'year to date' figures is now optional. Two extra payslip layouts are available that do not include these figures.
  
  
• International Payroll: there is now an option to print hours worked/overtime on the payslips. This can only be included on the payslip layouts that are not printing 'year to date' figures (due to lack of space).
  
  
• International Payroll: terms printed on the payslip such as 'Gross pay', 'Tax', etc. can now be modified by the user.
  
  
• International Payroll: the possible size of the numbers printed on a payslip has been increased, to as large as 999,999,999,999.99 in all but the small payslip that includes 'year to date' figures (due to lack of space).
  
  
• When printing a Delivery Note (print or PDF layout) for a customer, if the delivery address was different to the account address, it would get printed in the space reserved for the account address. Even if the delivery address had it's own space (in which case it would get printed twice). Fixed.
  
  
• When entering sales or purchase invoices, since v4.167 if the account code field was empty, control would go to the tax date or first quantity (depending on setting) instead of the account code input field. Fixed.
  
  
• When editing a sales invoice (when in mode 2: advanced mode), if a cost is edited in the costs section, the stock will not be updated correctly if the invoice is edited again. Fixed.
  
  
United Kingdom only:


• VAT100, sales and purchases were being added to box 8 and 9 respectively, based on the location of the customer or supplier, even if the VAT code used in transactions did not specify that box 8 or 9 should be used. Fixed.
  
  
• EC Sales List included transactions for which VAT had been charged. Fixed.
  
  
• EC Sales List did not strip off the leading two letters (the country code) of VAT codes. Fixed.
  
  
• Intrastat, both sales and purchases, included all EU sales/purchases, regardless of whether they were goods or services. It should, of course, just list goods. Fixed.
  
  

v4.168 31st October 2017

• United Kingdom only: payroll RTI now uses HMRCs new 'transaction engine'.
  
  
• Scotland only: payroll, when sending an FPS, Scottish tax codes would get rejected. Fixed.
  
  
• Stock Movement Analysis report did not show stock item movements for an item if the opening balance for the period being reported was zero. Fixed.
  
  

v4.167 23rd October 2017

• General/Nominal Ledger now has a transaction locate option the same as in the other two ledgers. This allows you to enter a criteria for searching, and a list of transactions found will appear. It's located at the bottom of the 'New Transactions' section in the menu.
  
  
• 'Printing' a list can now produce output up to 165 characters wide when using PDF (using an A3 page size). Physical printing can produce up to 115 characters wide, using A4 and a small font. The font size and page size (A4 or A3) will vary depending on the report you're using.
  
  
• 'Printing' a list now has two extra output options: Email (PDF) and Email (HTML).
  
  
• When entering invoices or credit notes for either customers or suppliers, the default initial cursor position can now be changed from the quantity input field to the tax date and reference fields if required. This is done in the Defaults and Variables option in the applicable setup menu.
  
  
• When entering supplier invoices in batch input, if a supplier has a default purchase analysis code that is now used. Previously only default Sales Tax/VAT and department codes were used.
  
  
• UK only: the EC Sales List report defaults to a monthly period. Although it can be changed to quarterly in the Defaults and Variables option in the Sales Ledger setup menu, it would revert back to monthly. Fixed.
  
  
• When entering a Sales Invoice, if the option to discount the whole invoice was used, the discounted amount would not be reflected in the "Analysis: Sales by Sales Type Code" report (ie. each code would report the full amount), or (if in the EU) the EC Sales List. Fixed.
  
  
• Shop/cafe Manager, Sales Counter option, when users logged out and back in via this option, the user log was not being updated. Fixed.
  
  
• Shop/cafe Manager, Sales Counter option, when selling vouchers, sometimes the software could get into a loop and keep providing new voucher numbers far in excess of the number of vouchers being sold. Fixed.
  
  
• Shop/cafe Manager, when listing vouchers, if the 'Redeem Voucher' button was clicked, and a voucher was redeemed, the list of vouchers did not get updated (although the redeem did work). Fixed.
  
  

v4.166 30th September 2017

• When entering cash/bank transactions directly into the General Ledger (Nominal Ledger), you can now specify whether you want the option of posting these transactions as being already reconciled. This option is setup from 'Defaults and Variables' in setup. This reconciliation option is not available in the 'Enter Journals' option, only the 'Payment Made..' and 'Payment Received..' options.
  
  
• United Kingdom only: The VAT period end option now contains a separate button for sending the VAT100 to HMRC, instead of it being incorporated into the VAT Period End button.
  
  
• EU only: the set up option for countries/regions now allows the EC 2 character country code to be added. In most cases this is the same as the ISO3166 2 character country code, except for Greece. When adding a country using the search button, the EC country code will be added automatically.
  
  
• Sales Invoices can now be posted with a total value of zero (it will go straight into 'history' as there's no outstanding balance). If the value ends up as zero as a result of some quantities being positive and some negative, and/or due to discounts (say 100% discount), postings may still be made into the General Ledger (Nominal Ledger), depending on the 'minimum postings' setting. This new facility can be disabled (ie. preventing zero invoices as before) in the A/c Receivable (Sales Ledger) Defaults and Variables option in the 'Setup' menu.
  
  
• When reports are output to PDF (file or view), they can now handle widths of around 160 characters. Probably only the 'General Stock' report can produce reports that wide.
  
  
• It was possible to display an existing customer/supplier account, or a stock item, and change it's code to an empty code. This has now been prevented, as empty account/stock codes could cause problems.
  
  
• When creating a new company/organization, sometimes an error message would appear: "File 'c:\adminsoft accounts\sl_stmnt.frx' does not exist. Fixed.
  
  
• The 'Revaluation' option for foreign bank accounts bases it's 'Corrected Bal.' suggestion based on the ledger currency value instead of the foreign currency value. Fixed.
  
  
• The 'Revaluation' option for foreign bank accounts should just make a posting in the ledger currency, the account currency posting should be 0.00, but instead it contained a value. Fixed.
  
  
• When the notes were edited in a contra in either ledger after it had been posted, the edit would not get saved. Fixed.
  
  
• Some reports when output to PDF were losing one or more columns on the right hand side. Fixed.
  
  
• The option to print labels from both customer and supplier account details did not default to the correct printer as set in the setup labels option. Fixed.
  
  
• When viewing saved reports (General -> List Previous Reports), although the report could be viewed, it would not display the number of pages. Fixed.
  
  
• When entering a supplier invoice and selecting items off a purchase order, if the purchase order was in a different currency to the invoice, the items would be incorrectly valued. Fixed.
  
  

v4.165 11th September 2017

• United Kingdom only: payroll could not submit RTI as from 2nd Sept.'17. HMRC are introducing a new system for RTI, which was supposed to be 1st Aug. And so Adminsoft was set to use the new system from 2nd Sept. But HMRC put it back to 18th Sept, and then put back to an unspecified date. Adminsoft Accounts will now continue to use the old system until HMRC actually have the new system up and running.
  
  
• United Kingdom only: the VAT period end (form VAT 100) can now be filed with HMRC from within Adminsoft Accounts. This works in a similar way to Payroll RTI.
  
  
• United Kingdom only: the EC Sales List (form VAT 101) can now be filed with HMRC from within Adminsoft Accounts. This works in a similar way to Payroll RTI.
  
  
• Data that requires extra security such as bank details of suppliers and employees, email SMTP details, and a few other data items are now automatically encrypted when saved into the data files.
  
  
• Old VAT/Sales Tax period end reports, the 'Display Summary' button is now automatically enabled straight away.
  
  
• A/c Receivable (Sales Ledger) menu, the bottom two or three options would sometimes vanish. This was due to the size of the menu. It has now been shortened by using sub-menus.
  
  
• In the 'Search the Help Text' option in the 'Help' menu. After searching for some text, the last line in the search results could not be clicked to view the details. Fixed.
  
  
• The Help text was not displaying any new notes entered by the user. Fixed.
  
  
• Entering adjustments or write-off transactions in a company/organization that was not VAT/Sales Tax registered was not possible as the OK button remained greyed out. Fixed.
  
  
• Payroll, none-UK, the 'Delete' button in the 'Payroll Additions/Deductions' option was always greyed out. Fixed.
  
  
• Remittance Advice option used the old type printer/output selection. Fixed.
  
  

v4.164 14th August 2017

• AutoManager, automatic scheduling of jobs for a vehicle or item of equipment is now easier. It also handles up to 7 jobs (it used to be 5).
  
  
• When viewing customer account details, if the option to view in the customers account currency was selected, the figures did not always show the correct amounts. Fixed.
  
  
• The 'Customer Payment' option that automatically appears when a Sales Invoice has been entered for a cash customer would show payment methods used for foreign currency bank accounts, even though the option could only process payments in the ledger currency. Fixed. This option is no longer available if the invoice is not in the ledger currency, the standard payment entry option appears instead.
  
  
• The 'Invoice Receipt' option in supplier account details suffered from a similar problem to the 'Customer Payment' option discussed above. Fixed.
  
  
• In the 'Defaults and Variables' option in A/c Receivable (Sales Ledger) set up, the 'Invoice/Credit Note Qty input field' and the 'Invoice/Credit Note Each input field' would not allow a format to be entered that did not include decimal places. It would display a message saying there were too many decimal places. Fixed.
  
  

v4.163 26th July 2017

• Payroll - United Kingdom only, RTI Transaction Engine updated as required by HMRC.
  
  
• When entering sales invoices, credit notes, estimates, etc. the tax date always defaulted to 'to days' date. That action can now be changed in setup. If required, the system can always leave the date empty, forcing the user to manually enter a date.
  
  
• Payroll, international, the 'Term for employee tax reference' and the 'Term for employer tax reference' have been increased from 10 to 15 characters. Note: the full 15 characters can only be printed on the larger payslip, there isn't room on the smaller payslip. Also, the maximum value for the salary and tax to date figures has been increased from 999,999,999.99 to 999,999,999,999.99 again, this is only on the larger payslip.
  
  
• Payroll, international, the number of income tax bands has been increased from 5 to 10.
  
  
• Payroll, both United Kingdom and international versions, any employer contributions (created via the additions/deductions option) will now appear at the bottom of the payslip, below all the other employees pay details for that period. This applies to the large payslip format only.
  
  
• Under the 'Help' menu, there is a new option 'Search for Help Text' that does exactly that. It allows you to search for any help text in any or all modules.
  
  
• The Manufacturer Details option in the Inventory/Stock Control menu can now list all stock items and all suppliers related to that manufacturer, ie. where the manufacturer has been entered in the stock item supplier record.
  
  
• AutoManager, the option for automatic scheduling of services/tests has been made easier to use.
  
  
• In supplier account details, if the suppliers account was in ledger currency, and the cursor went though the currency input field (leaving it unchanged) or the 'Save' button was clicked, the 'Show/Print in Default Currency' button would appear. Even though the account was in the ledger currency. Fixed.
  
  
• In the option to edit account periods, the 'Delete Year' button did not work. Fixed.
  
  
• The Profit and Loss report, right hand section that allows comparison between years, produced 'year to date' figures only. Instead of starting at the account period specified. Fixed.
  
  
• When printing Remittance Advices, the date shown is the date the Remittance Advice was created, and not the date the Remittance Advice was or is due to be paid. Fixed. Note: if you have edited your Remittance Advice layout, you will need to delete the old date field and replace it with the new 'Data paid___' data field. If you have not edited the layout, the date field should be replaced automatically.
  
  

v4.162 26th May 2017

• Supplier account can now have a default Purchase Analysis code, used when entering invoices.
  
  
• Payroll - UK only - the EAS (Employee Alignment Summary) has been removed, as it's no longer required.
  
  
• Payroll, the additions and deductions can now be applied to a band of gross pay. ie. a starting level and an upper level can be set, where the addition/deduction is percentage based.
  
  
• Shop / Cafe Manager can now re-print a receipt (option in: List Receipts, select Receipt Details).
  
  
• Sales Invoices, Advice Notes, Estimates and Proforma Invoices can now have solvent content and the individual unit of measure for each stock item added to both print/PDF and HTML layouts.
  
  
• Purchase Orders can now have weight, solvent content and the individual unit of measure for each stock item added to both print/PDF and HTML layouts.
  
  
• Purchase Orders now support an alternative supplier name and address.
  
  
• When setting up new country codes, the software suggested selecting a two character ISO3166 code, even though the ledger itself was using the 3 character version. Fixed. The country code setup option now suggests the 3 character code (updating the software will not change any existing country codes that may have been setup).
  
  
• In the list of companies/organizations that appears on start up, the date of the last backup would be shown in whatever the date format was of the last companies/organization selected. Fixed. It now always shows the date format as per the Windows setup, if possible.
  
  
• The Enter Journals option can now print a wide format report, which includes the 'Description or Ref.' and handles larger numbers, up to 999,999,999,999.99 Make sure 'Use wide report for 'Print Batch' is selected. Note: if you're using the narrow version of the Enter Journals option (800 pixels wide, only used if space is not available on screen for the normal width), then the 'Description or Ref.' will not appear in the wide report, as it's not available as a separate input in the journal entry.
  
  
• In the 'Advice Notes' option in the 'Lists' section, when a customer with Advice Notes was selected and the 'Create Invoice' button clicked, it did not invoice the Advice Notes correctly. Fixed.
  
  
• In the 'Acquire Document Images' option, the 'Locate File' button had stopped working. Fixed.
  
  
• Stock/Inventory Control, a commission amount or rate can be specified for each item. But it did not automatically calculate the sales commission when entering a Sales Invoice. Fixed.
  
  
• When producing a Balance Sheet report for a particular department, deleted journals were being included in the figures. Fixed.
  
  
• If Sales Tax/VAT was not enabled, and then after transactions have been entered it was enabled, any transactions created using the supplier 'Quick' invoice option would be reported in the data integrity report saying the Sales Tax/VAT does not balance. Fixed.
  
  
• AutoManager, adding new job/service types with Sales Tax/VAT disabled, the 'Save' button remained greyed out, preventing any new jobs/services from being created. Fixed.
  
  
• Payroll - UK only, details of company vehicles no longer used by an employee could be sent via FPS (unless the vehicle was specifically set to not be included), the FPS would then be rejected by HMRC. Fixed.
  
  
• When viewing a Sales Invoice, if the 'Copy' button was clicked to create another invoice based on the invoice being viewed, the 'Disc' button (if available) remained greyed out. Fixed.
  
  
• HTML layouts were not being updated when the software was updated. Fixed.
  
  

v4.160 8th April 2017

• Purchase Orders: long stock codes and descriptions would get truncated (ie. cut short), even when the layout was edited to use the 65 character stock code/description data item. Two new layouts have been created, based on the existing layouts, the names of them end with '- wide'. They will show the stock code/description in full, but they use an A3 size page, and so are too wide to print (unless you print in landscape), but are idea for use with PDF's.
  
  
• Purchase Orders would allow a negative amount to be entered into the 'Received' column. But a P/O has no mechanism for taking items out of stock. So negative numbers can no longer be entered.
  
  
• AutoManager: Parts Counter stock item selection has been cleaned up a little. It now displays the reatil 'price per' field, and displays prices including and excluding Sales Tax/VAT.
  
  
• AutoManager: a year of manufacture can now be added to vehicle/equipment details.
  
  
• When setting up a new company/organization, a new payment code 'BT' is now automatically setup in payments for both sales and purchases. This is for 'Bank Transfer', which covers basically any transaction that is directly paid into or out of the bank. This is probably the most frequent payment type these days, along side credit/debit cards anyway.
  
  
• Accounts, stock items, diary entries and invoices can all have images attached to them. You can now drag and drop images into the image options, which can be faster than using a 'Locate' or 'Browse' button.
  
  
• Emails, when sending one or more attachments, instead of using the 'Add File' button, you can now just drag and drop the file from Windows Explorer into the attachments list.
  
  
• Payroll: it's now possible to create an addition or deduction code that is automatically calculated based on a percentage of the total employees pay before tax. It is also possible to create an employer contribution, this could be used for pensions (see below), health insurance, etc.
  
  
• Payroll: there is now a choice of two layouts. The existing small layout (about 4 or 5 pay slips to the page), and a large format layout (only 2 pay slips per page). The large layout will print addition/deduction descriptions in full (the small layout only printed the first 15 characters), and will print ALL of the additions/deductions, up to a maximum of 13 (the small pay slip could only print the first 4). To change to the new layout, click on 'Setup' on the top menu bar, go down to 'HR/Payroll', and select 'Payroll Defaults and Variables'.
  
  
• Payroll: United Kingdom only, two new addition/deduction codes are created to handle the workplace pension scheme. The first code is WPS. This works out the employee deduction, before tax, based on a percentage of the total of the employees pre-tax pay, The second, WPSEM works out the percentage of the employers contribution. This is not a straight percentage, as the employees contribution only applies to pay that is between the LEL and UEL. If you want to make a contribution regardless of LEL/UEL (which is within HMRC rules), you will need to create a different Employer Contribution code (this is done in the additions/deductions setup screen).
  
  
• Payroll, in the 'Pay Input' option, when the 'Pay All Employees' button was clicked, some times the software would report that not all employees had been processed, even when they had. Fixed.
  
  
• Payroll: in the actual 'Payroll' option, after the payment to HMRC was recorded, the 'Amount Owed' figure showed an incorrect balance (although it was correct next time the 'Payroll' option was selected). Fixed.
  
  
• Sales Tax/VAT: Entering more than around 200 characters into the 'Notes' input field for a tax code would stop the Sales Tax/VAT codes from being listed, preventing any further editing of Sales Tax/VAT codes. Fixed.
  
  
• In 'Receive Stock from Supplier' and 'Send Stock Back to Supplier' options, if enough items were added to cause the list to scroll, it was not always possible using the up arrow key on the left to get the top of the list back to line 1. Some times it would stop scrolling at line 2, 3, 4, or 5. Fixed.
  
  
• Aged Debtors and Creditors reports, when printing for a date other than 'todays' date, and using month names as the column headers, it would print the correct figures, but print the wrong months at the head of each column. Fixed.
  
  
• Various documents when output in HTML, could wrap some of the fields. This means, a long stock code and description, for example, could end up being part displayed on the line below it. This would push that column down one line, throwing it out of line against the other columns. Fixed.
  
  
• AutoManager: Service Counter, when a job was invoiced, the status of the job did not get updated to 'Invoiced'. (note, the job will remain as 'Completed' until the invoice is actually posted to the account) Fixed.
  
  
• AutoManager: an invoice when raised from Service Counter would re-cost all stock items before posting. This could cause an issue when using COGS, as the new costs may differ from the original costs (bearing in mind the stock has already been booked out to the job). Fixed.
  
  
• AutoManager: Parts Counter, when an item was sold that had a retail 'price per' that was not 1, if the cursor was placed in price 'Each' column (this has now been renamed to 'retail') the item price was miscalculated. Fixed.
  
  

v4.159 7th March 2017

• Purchase Order Processing: if a stock item description is changed in a P/O when it's created, when the stock is then received, the edited stock item description is used in the stock movements file. Note, the description in the stock item record itself does not get changed.
  
  
• The 'Receive Stock from Supplier' option now allows stock item descriptions to be edited. Any changes then show up i the stock movement record. Note, the description in the stock item record itself does not get changed.
  
  
• General Stock Report, in the 'Stock Movements' section the price was always the retail/selling price. Now, if the stock movement is not due to goods to/from a customer, it will show the cost price instead.
  
  
• General Stock Report, in the 'Suppliers for this Stock Item' section, a cost price has been added. This will be the last cost used for this supplier, or if that's zero, it will be the suppliers published cost price, if available.
  
  
• General Stock Report, the 'Stock Movements' and 'Stock Sales History' sections will now show an alternative customer/supplier name if there is one.
  
  
• In the stock menu, in the 'List' section there is a new option 'Estimated Stock Items'. This will list all stock items in Estimates produced by Account Receivable/Sales Ledger.
  
  
• There is now an option to record a users activity within the accounts system. This can log which forms (ie. options) they go into, and can also record which accounts and stock items have been viewed. It's enabled in the user details option. By default this option is disabled.
  
  
• United Kingdom only, the payroll has now been updated ready for tax year 2017/18. This includes the currently optional RTI reporting of company cars used by employees.
  
  
• Default printers selected for Sales Invoices, Delivery Notes, Proforma Invoices, Advice Notes and Statements are now specific to the workstation in use. So the software can now handle the situation where different workstations on a network use different printers.
  
  
• AutoManager, the 'Sales Invoice Discount Rate' now applies to both Parts Counter and Service Counter invoices.
  
  
• Cash/Bank/Credit Card Account Statement and Reconciliation. The opening balance would initially be correct, but if the From/To transaction dates where changed the same opening balance was used (unless the 'Display' button was clicked). Fixed.
  
  
• In the 'Suppliers' report, any notes in an account record were not printed out correctly. They were printed across the page, instead of down the page as they would appear in the account record. Fixed.
  
  
• When viewing a report on screen and using the 'Find' facility. If the text being searched for was off screen when found, the software would often not re-position the list so the found text was visible. Fixed.
  
  
• When viewing a report on screen, if the width accidentally exceeded 254 characters, the application could hang or abruptly exit. Fixed.
  
  
• When a 'Help' button is clicked on any form, and the 'Print Help' button then clicked, it would not output the help text to any device/application if the Help form was using IE to render the text. Fixed. (please note, the print output is in ASCII text only, so things like color, fonts, etc. will not appear)
  
  
• The cash drawer would not open unless a receipt was being printed. Fixed.
  
  
• The 'Disc' button was greyed out when working with a saved or recurring sales invoice. Fixed.
  
  
• AutoManager, in the Service Counter option, if the retail price of stock items was set to include Sales Tax/VAT and the customers discount code was for Markup on Cost, the marked up cost price used would have Sales Tax/VAT taken of it, even though there was none to begin with (costs always exclude Sales Tax/VAT). Fixed.
  
  

v4.157 14th February 2017

• A new option has been added to Nominal/General Ledger: Standing Journals. This allows you to create a batch of journals, which can be saved, posted and re-posted, as many times as you wish.
  
  
• When selecting an account period from a list of account periods, the current account period is now highlighted.
  
  
• Both customer and supplier lists can now be dragged wider to expose the country and address of each account.
  
  
• AutoManager: in Job Details the bottom section of the screen containing individual job details, notes, parts required and job history could not be accessed (although the narrow version, automatically used where screen size is limited, did work OK). Fixed.
  
  

v4.156 9th February 2017

• Many input fields have been generally improved. Where the user enters invalid data, the input background will be shaded light red. In many cases it will not be possible to save the data until it's valid, although some of the larger more complicated forms will save, but will correct the data by replacing the bad inputs with defaults. Also, all 'traps' have been removed from input fields, where a user could get stuck in an input until the correct information was entered.
  
  
• Purchase Invoices and Credit Notes: the description of the transaction will always take the first line of any alternative address. If there is no alternative address, you can now set up what data you would like in the description instead.
  
  
• The 'List Previous Reports' option, when a save report was first selected, a message would appear saying the software was unable to open the necessary files. Although it did actually work. Fixed.
  
  
• Stock Control, the Sales Commission report, a staff member could not be selected using the find option, also, when a staff members initials were typed in, the report would print for that staff member, but would also include all staff members that followed (alphabetically). Fixed.
  
  
• AutoManager, in the Service Counter, any parts booked to a job would display excluding any Sales Tax/VAT (as all stock items are listed as including Sales Tax/VAT when the AutoManager module is used). However, when the sales invoice was created, Sales Tax/VAT would again be deducted from the price of any parts. Fixed.
  
  
• AutoManager, in the Service Counter option, the 'Summary' section did not show the correct charges. Fixed.
  
  
• Editing print/PDF Advice Note layouts, the list of available layouts did not indicate which were set as the default layouts for print or PDF. Fixed.
  
  
• Copying a print/PDF/HTML layout from another ledger or the system, no longer worked! Fixed.
  
  
• AutoManager - Parts Counter, could not print to a normal printer or output device (Receipt printer option worked fine). Fixed.
  
  
• The 'List Recurring Invoices' option in the Sales Ledger (Account Receivable, would display an error message if the 'From' and/or 'To' dates were changed, and the list re-loaded. Fixed.
  
  
• In the Miscellaneous Defaults and Variables option, the input field 'Default document print' for selecting the default ouput device for documents such as invoices, would not retain the value if it was set to a Windows print device (such as an actual printer, fax, or PDF converter, etc.). Also, if the input field was left blank, the wrong message would be displayed. Fixed.
  
  
• When creating account periods for a year using 'Calendar Month', apart from the first month, it would always start off each month on the 1st. For many users this was not an issue, but if you wanted to start your account period on the 5th of each month, say, only the first period would start on the 5th, the rest for that year would start on the 1st. The same also applied to quarterly account periods. Fixed.
  
  

v4.154 3rd January 2017

• The General Stock Report now has an option for some data items (typically retail values and costs) to print as 18 characters, providing a maximum value of 999,999,999,999.99 The old 10 character versions are still there, providing a maximum value of 999,999.99 (useful if space on your report is at a premium).
  
  
• The Sales Tax/VAT period end report now includes an option for printing out the account address for each transaction (or an alternative address if one has been entered).
  
  
• When backing up via email, you can now elect to save the email address/s used, so they automatically appear when the backup via email option is next selected.
  
  
• Ledgers for both customers and suppliers now have an option to list current and previous transaction disputes.
  
  
• In the Defaults and Variables option for Stock/Inventory Control, if there is a path set up in the input field 'Path to Stock Images' and it's edited, it will ask if any images using the previous path need to have their paths updated to the new path.
  
  
• Stock Control/Inventory, when creating a 'Reason for Adjustment', an account could be associated with the new reason. But when a stock adjustment was made, there was no posting into the General (Nominal) Ledger. Fixed.
  
  
• When selecting an output format/application for documents or reports, if some options were greyed out, and an actual printer was selected and then the 'Select Printer' button clicked, the printer would not always get selected. Fixed.
  
  
• Stock Control, in set up, when entering a new 'Reason for Adjustment' code, the 'Code' input field did not search correctly to ensure the new code was unique. This could result is duplicate codes being created, or a message saying a code had already been used, when in fact it hadn't. Fixed.
  
  
• The 'Proforma Invoices' option in the A/c Receivable (Sales Ledger) menu did not work if it was asked to re-load the data. Messages would appear saying it couldn't open the files. Fixed.
  
  
• When installing Adminsoft Accounts and creating the first company/organization, if the date format set in Windows was not the same as the standard format for your country, the account periods would not be set up correctly. Fixed.
  
  
• In the Sales Counter option in AutoParts, if a default Sales Tax/VAT code was selected for a customer, and the code was only one digit, the stock item default was still used. Fixed.
  
  
• When trying to exit Adminsoft Accounts, some users have reported that exit sometimes did not respond. Fixed.
  
  
• The Audit Trail report in the General Ledger (Nominal Ledger), when a find date button was clicked it would allow a selection from account periods instead of an actual calendar date. Fixed.
  
  
• Payroll, United Kingdom only, an FPS could not be submitted as a message would appear saying the software was out of date (this was due to us moving into 2017). Fixed.
  
  
• When raising a sales invoice for a job in AutoManager, if the customer had a default Sales Tax/VAT code set up, it would not be used for parts, and would only be used for labor if the code was two digits. Fixed.
  
  

v4.151 8th December 2016

• The 'Receive Stock From Supplier' option now creates/updates the supplier item record as necessary. Up to now, only Purchase Orders created/updated this record.
  
  
• The option to select an output device/application for reports has undergone another change. When an output is selected, an appropriate icon appears along side the description. This has necessitated a change in the design of the button.
  
  
• When selecting the 'Setup' option in some of the 'Find' forms (that list Sales Analysis codes, currencies, and so on), the set up screen would not always behave properly. Fixed.
  
  
• Purchase Orders received did not always update the stock item costs correctly, usually where the items were costed in multiples and there was a potential rounding error. The software tried to correct the rounding error, but miscalculated the cost in the process. Fixed.
  
  

v4.150 6th December 2016

• When running reports or documents (such as invoices, statements, etc.), to select the output you now have to click a button rather than use a drop down list. Clicking the button brings up an array of output options, which is much clearer and easier to use than the old list.
  
  
• When a transaction is automatically posted into the General (Nominal) Ledger by a customer or supplier transaction, for consistency the customer or supplier account code is added, plus the transaction type, transaction reference, and the transaction description. Not all users want all this information in the description of the General Ledger transaction, so now these items are selectable (in the 'Defaults and Variables' option for General Ledger.
  
  
• The 'Invoice Receipt' and 'Credit Rcpt' options in supplier account details did not update the annual 'Purchases' figure. Fixed. To fix previous postings, click on 'Setup' on the top menu bar, 'System', then 'Database - Fixing', and in the 'A/c Payable' or 'Purchase Ledger' section, click 'Correct Purch Year to Date on accounts' button.
  
  
• Allocation of transactions (for both sales and purchases) did not always display correctly when viewed. Sometimes an imbalance was reported, when there was none (including in the Data Integrity check). Also, contra's did not correctly allocate transactions. Fixed.
  
  
• When searching for things like Sales Analysis Codes, Payment Type Codes, etc. if the 'Setup' button was clicked, and a new code (or whatever it was) was added, often it would not automatically appear in the list. User had to exit the search/find and then click the search/find button again. Fixed.
  
  
• In AutoManager, Job Details, when adding a part, the software did not recognize superceeded parts. Fixed.
  
  
• When using the 'Quick Backup to Hard Disk' and 'Backup to Folder' options, the document layouts would not be backed up. Fixed.
  
  
• When a backup is restored, if it was not in the form of a ZIP file, then the document layouts would not be restored, even if present, only the data. Fixed.
  
  
• Payroll, the 'Period ends at end of month' input field in the payroll details/setup did not get saved, which meant if the payroll was monthly, the next period option would always select the last day in the month (it needed to be edited each time if this was not the case). Fixed.
  
  
• From a Sales Invoices, Delivery Notes wouldn't output to some device types/formats. Fixed.
  
  
• Purchase Orders, in the Good Received option, the 'Print Rcvd' button to produce a report listing the items received used the output as selected on the 'Print Order' button, instead of it's own output selection. Fixed.
  
  

v4.149 15th November 2016

• An alternative address for suppliers can now be entered in the 'Receive Stock from Supplier' and 'Send Stock back to Supplier' options.
  
  
• In the 'List Journals' option, the journal reference number has been added to the right hand side of the list. You will have to drag the form wide in order to see it.
  
  
• When editing journals, or after posting them, the 'Print Batch' report now shows the journal numbers.
  
  
• The wide version of the Sales Tax/VAT period end full report now shows the transaction description on each line for the A/c Receivable (Sales) and A/c Payable (Purchase) ledgers. The General (Nominal) Ledger section also has some extra information added onto each line.
  
  
• When entering Adjustments and Write-Offs in either ledger, the user can now change the default General (Nominal) Ledger account.
  
  
• If an installation was less than 10 days old, the system would not allow the user FIRST to be deleted. Now it'll simply give an extra warning, but will allow it to be deleted.
  
  
• New users will now default to Level 2: Advanced Level, instead of Level 1: Basic Level.
  
  
• When viewing a Purchase Invoice received from a supplier, there is now a button that will create a Credit Note based on the Invoice details.
  
  
• Sales and Purchase Analysis reports now produce numbers with wider fields, enabling larger numbers to be printed. This avoids seeing ***,***.** where numbers are too large to print (or output to Excel etc).
  
  
• When in the Bank Reconciliation option, if 'Payment to Supplier' as selected, when a supplier was chosen the suppliers preferred payment method did not appear as the default. Fixed.
  
  
• The Send Stock Back to Supplier option can produce a Delivery Note. The HTML version of the Delivery Note did not always work. Fixed.
  
  
• When the SKU of a superceeded item was entered into a Purchase Order or Sales Invoice, the item it superceeded to would not be selected. Fixed.
  
  

v4.148 12th October 2016

• The Alternative Customer Address added recently to Sales Invoices, has now been added to Sales Invoices in Parts Counter, and to Purchase Invoices.
  
  
• When entering contra's, you can now manually enter details for each part of the transaction. If left empty, it will default to the customer/suppliers name as before.
  
  
• When viewing cash/bank statements, there is now a button to reverse the out/in columns. Also, when the form is closed, the settings for date order and out/in column order will remain.
  
  
• Customer Proforma Invoices can now be edited.
  
  
• When entering payments straight into the General Ledger (Nominal Ledger), there is now a button 'Add Payment Code' that will list the available payment types, allow you to select one, and then add it to the beginning of the 'Description or reference' input field. You can still enter a description, and if there's a description already in there, it'll automatically get moved to the right to make way for the payment code. The code doesn't do anything as such, it's simply provided here to help with bank reconciliation, so you can see what payment method was used. Use of this button is of course optional.
  
  
• Sales Tax/VAT Period End report now has an option to print invoice/credit note lines. It also has an option to print in wide format (ie. landscape) which means it will also include the gross amount and the customers/suppliers tax reference.
  
  
• The Sales Tax/VAT setup option and the Period End option now have links to download our free guide to setting up and operating Sales Tax/VAT. The guide is in the form of a PDF file.
  
  
• When a Proforma received from a supplier was entered, if the details were brought back on screen the body of the proforma could be typed into, even though it was not in edit mode. But things like totals would not update. Fixed. Most input fields are now read-only until the Edit button is clicked.
  
  
• When entering sales Credit or Debit Notes, the 'Disc' button would not always allow the user to enter the required discount. Fixed.
  
  
• When entering sales invoices or credit notes, entering an overall discount could occasionally introduce a penny error between the transaction sub-total, and the sub-total as calculated for the Sales Tax/VAT. This would usually happen when one or more items were of a very low value. Fixed.
  
  
• Payroll (mostly United Kingdom users only), if a payslip was selected from the 'Pay History' in the employee details, and the payslip wasn't processed, the 'Change Tax & NI Figures' and 'Veiw Tax & NI Summary' buttons (only available when it's not processed) would not work. Fixed.
  
  
• Sales Tax/VAT Period End report, adjustments that contained a tax element would sometimes produce a message in the 'Full Report' which would start "TAX BALANCE: Tax record 0.00". It didn't affect the actual tax figures, but of course was concerning to users. Fixed.
  
  
• Sales Tax/VAT Period End report, where a transaction contained a Sales Tax/VAT code that is excluded from the Sales Tax/VAT Period End report, although the transaction is printed, it's not included in the tax figures in the summary. Which is correct. However, under the transaction a message would appear starting "BALANCE: Tax record 0.00". Fixed.
  
  
• When displaying a saved batch of Opening Balances that were not subject to Sales Tax/VAT (in either ledger). When transactions were clicked on, the 'Total Value' and 'Transactions' figures in the top right hand corner no longer displayed the true figures. Although the batch would post OK. Fixed.
  
  
• When entering Opening Balances for customers (only applies to the wide version of the form), if a transaction was clicked, edited, and then saved, it's details in the list would no longer line up. Although the batch would post OK. Fixed.
  
  
• When a Sales Invoice was deleted or edited, the sales figures for any stock items on the invoice did not update correctly. Fixed.
  
  
• When running the profit & Loss report ('Income Statement' in some countries), if a different output was selected for the report, the report run, and then another report was run straight away, the output would be the default output, rather than the selected output. Fixed.
  
  

v4.147 22nd September 2016

• Exchange rate used for foreign currencies has been increased from four decimal places to seven.
  
  
• When entering Sales Invoices and Credit Notes, it is now possible to enter an alternative name and address for the customer. This should be very useful where you have a number of one-off sales put through a miscellaneous cash sales account.
  
  
• When entering Supplier Invoices and Credit Notes, the software will now check to see if there is another transaction for that supplier account on the same date with the same reference. If there is, it'll warn the user the invoice or credit note they are entering could be a duplicate.
  
  
• Background images can now be applied to forms. To do this, click on 'Setup' on the top menu bar, go down to 'Miscellaneous' and select 'Set Background Images'. Click the 'Help' button for an explanation of how to do it. Any new companies/organisations will use background images by default.
  
  
• Editing a Sales Payment, if the value of the transaction was edited, the change was not saved. This bug must have crept in recently, perhaps in the last month or so. Fixed.
  
  
• When a Purchase Order was created, the cost used got written into the suppliers item details as an 'each' price, instead of using the 'costper'. If the 'costper' was not 1, the next Purchase Order would then use the wrong price (it would be far lower than it should have been). Fixed.
  
  
• The 'Last Cost' field in the supplier part details can now be edited, in order to allow any corrections that may be necessary due to the above issue.
  
  

v4.146 6th September 2016

• The icon for Adminsoft Accounts on the Windows desktop has changed. Though if you are updating the software, your desktop icon will probably remain the same.
  
  
• Documents (such as PDF files) can now be attached to assets, stock items, Purchase Orders, Sales Invoices and Purchase Invoices (for the invoices the system has to be using wide forms, these are automatically selected where there is sufficient width).
  
  
• The General/Nominal Ledger account details form now shows a debit/credit balance for the period balances. This extra column is only available in the wide version of the form, which is selected automatically if Adminsoft Accounts is running in a window at least 1200 pixels wide.
  
  
• When viewing at a statement for cash/bank accounts, a single right click can mark a transaction as reconciled or unreconciled. The buttons are still there for use if required.
  
  
• VAT in the United Kingdom, in the VAT 100 report, boxes 8 and 9 now depend on the VAT code used rather than the location of the customer/supplier as specified in their account. This allows postings for sale or purchase of goods to/from the EC to be posted directly into the Nominal Ledger/Cash Book. But the original method of using the country code is still there for backward compatibility, the favoured method is to select via the VAT code.
  
  
• VAT in the United Kingdom, a reverse charge for services would only work where the supplier was in another member state within the EU, as specified by the country code in the suppliers account details. But the reverse charge may also be applicable to suppliers outside of the EC, and so now the location of the supplier is ignored. If the VAT code used is setup for a reverse charge, then it will be used. This allows reverse charges to be made when posting directly into the Nominal Ledger/Cash Book. Also, the reverse charge is now available to users in any country, not just the UK.
  
  
• The Sales Tax/VAT period always defaulted to 3 months, to end of the month. This can now be changed by the user in the General/Nominal Ledger setup 'Defaults and Variables' option.
  
  
• Print/PDF layouts: the software by default will check the layout for references to any graphics files. If it finds a reference to a file that can not be found, it deletes the reference (the graphic data item in the layout will be removed). You can change this behaviour if you wish in the 'Defaults and Variables' option in the 'Miscellaneous' setup menu. Please note, if a graphics file that does not exist is referenced from a layout, the document may not print (hence the default action).
  
  
• In AutoManager, the default department code for Service Counter always got set to the same department code as the Parts Counter, no matter what was entered. Fixed.
  
  
• When clicking the 'Create A New Supplier' or 'Create A New Customer' buttons from a 'Find Supplier' or 'Find Customer' option, the account form that appeared ready to accept the new account details could not be moved around the screen. Fixed.
  
  
• If a company/organization was set to not use Sales Tax/VAT, when running in Advanced mode, a sales invoice would not save the retail price of an item when invoicing from stock. Fixed.
  
  

v4.144 1st August 2016

• HTML document layouts now have some extra data fields available for currency. These will display the currency code (option for full description is still there), and also the ledger currency is now available.
  
  
• In the stock item details form, the list of Purchase Orders now displays the cost each with the correct number of decimal places. Previously, it was always 4 decimal places, regardless of the setting.
  
  
• Purchase Orders can now include 'Extra' descriptions in the stock item details (if any). This facility must be turned on via 'Purchase Defaults and Variables' option in the Order Processing setup menu.
  
  
• When refunding a customer, it's now possible to print out a 'Refund Payment Advice'.
  
  
• When creating a Purchase Order using the 'Build Up Order From Stock' option, the items were not getting a cost price. This bug has just crept in recently. Fixed.
  
  
• When receiving goods into a Purchase Order, if new items were added to the order, the software would not always automatically display the correct item cost. Fixed.
  
  
• In the Parts Counter option in the AutoManager module, only a maximum of one associated item would ever be listed, regardless of the actual number of associated items. Also, not all the buttons that should have been highlighted were actually highlighted. Fixed.
  
  

v4.143 23rd July 2016

• A lot of work has been done on stock costs. It can often be difficult to work out how the software has obtained a cost, this is hopefully now a little more straight forward, and the 'Help' buttons provide more guidance. This affects Sales Invoices, Purchase Orders, and the 'Receive Stock from Supplier' and 'Return Stock to Supplier' options.
  
  
• Purchase Orders, and the 'Receive Stock from Supplier' and 'Return Stock to Supplier' options can now handle individual stock item prices of up to six decimal places. To handle this, when moving items in/out of stock the 'cost per' field in the movement record will be automatically setup, but it may or may not be the same as the 'cost per' value as in the stock item details record.
  
  
• Post dated transactions would appear in creditors and debtors reports in the 'Older' column, when reporting by calendar month (instead of the default, '30 day', '60 day' etc.). They now appear in the current month column. Although this is not strictly correct, of course. But we don't want to create an extra column just for post dated transactions. Note, when producing a creditors and debtors report for a previous date, post dated transactions will not be included.
  
  
• When transactions are posted from customers or suppliers to the General Ledger (Nominal Ledger), the description in the G/L transaction will now be a little more meaningful, and a lot more consistent. The format will always be: account code, transaction type, followed by any references or description taken from the source transaction.
  
  
• When a N/L (G/L) transaction was edited that had been created by another ledger or module, it would no longer indicate it had initially been created from the other ledger/module. Fixed.
  
  
• Purchases, invoice and credit receipt options (where simple invoice/credit note and payment entered in one go) did not take the default Sales Tax/VAT code (if set up) from the supplier account. Fixed.
  
  
• Once a payment received from a customer was posted, a receipt could not be printed. Fixed.
  
  
• When entering a customer or supplier payment in a currency other than the ledger currency, if the exchange rate was set to 1, the software would not ask for the ledger currency value of the payment. Fixed.
  
  
• Sometimes, reports output to PDF would lose part of the print on the right hand side. Fixed.
  
  

v4.141 14th May 2016

• Payments, refunds, and bounced payments (dishonored checks, etc.) for both customers and suppliers, where a foreign currency is entered, there is now an option to edit the amount calculated as the ledgers default currency. This should help a lot when dealing with foreign currency transactions in/out of a bank/cash account that's in the ledgers default currency. It should reduce the number of adjustments required due to currency fluctuations.
  
  
• Budget report displayed 'this period' in the report, but in fact it should have said 'year to date'. Fixed. There is now an option to print for a specific period or year to date.
  
  
• Supplier details, 'Make checks payable to' input field size increased from 40 characters to 60.
  
  
• Report 'Payment Type Analysis' for customers and suppliers can now be selected for a specific account.
  
  
• In the customer account details screen, wide 960 pixel width version, when listing transactions that were in a currency other than the ledger currency, it would display the currency code next to the amount. As the amount was shown in the ledger currency, this was confusing. It now just shows a 'c' so the user knows the transaction is not in the ledger currency. There is an option to also display in the customers default currency, in which case no currency code is shown, unless the transaction is not in the customers default currency (which could still lead to some confusion, but it's unusual to mix currencies within one account).
  
  
• When a screen or form image is saved (options to do this are in the 'Help' menu), it now displays the location and file name of the saved image. So you don't have to go searching for it!
  
  
• Stock items can now be archived. This does not remove any data. Much like archived accounts, the item will only appear when the stock code has been entered, or in lists of stock movements/sales. An item can be un-archived at any time. Also, there is an option to list all archived stock items.
  
  
• Basic guides are now included (in the form of PDF files). One deals with installation, the other deals with the basics of setting up the accounts system for the first time, and the third one is an introduction to creating accounts and entering simple transactions. These guides are not in depth, and will be of more interest to very new users.
  
  
• If a deleted sales invoice/credit note was undeleted, any stock items would not have the stock movement or stock levels updated. Fixed.
  
  
• In the customer account details screen, narrow 800 pixel width version, current transactions, once the 'Show Profit' button was clicked, although it worked fine, the button caption would change to 'Date Typ'. Fixed.
  
  
• In the customer account details screen, narrow 800 pixel width version, an invoice that was set as being 'in dispute' could no longer be selected from the list of current transactions. Fixed.
  
  
• When entering a supplier invoice using the 'Invoice Receipt' or 'Quick Input Invoice' option, it was possible to enter the details without entering a Sales Tax/VAT code. Fixed.
  
  
• If a company/organization was not registered for Sales Tax/VAT, the supplier invoice 'Invoice Receipt' or 'Quick Input Invoice' options would still allow input for Sales Tax/VAT code, and show a tax amount. Fixed.
  
  

v4.140 9th April 2016

• Label printing can now have a default printer set.
  
  
• In employee details, the label setup used the A/c Payable (Purchase Ledger) setup. It now has its own setup.
  
  
• Profit & Loss, Balance Sheet, and Trial Balance reports now all have an option to print accounts with no balances (the default is not to print them).
  
  
• AutoManager, it's now possible to re-print a receipt (in the 'List Sales' option).
  
  
• It is now possible to test the printer and cash drawer in the setup 'Till & Receipt Printer' option.
  
  
• A/c Payable (Purchase Ledger), batched payments posted the payment amount to the wrong account. Fixed.
  
  
• A/c Payable (Purchase Ledger), batched payments, when listing the transactions in this option, the last transaction in the batch was not visible. Fixed.
  
  
• When printing any list or a receipt from the 'Display Receipt' option, if a specific Windows printer was selected, the selection was ignored. Output always went to the default Windows printer. Fixed.
  
  
• In the 'Display Receipt' option, when a receipt was printed to a Windows printer, it would include a report header. Fixed.
  
  

v4.138 29th March 2016

• Payroll, United Kingdom only, the P60 report has been updated for current and next tax year.
  
  
• In employee details, documents can now be made private (ie. seen by selected users only) in the same way as diary entries.
  
  
• AutoManager, in the AutoParts Sales Counter option, stock items that were not priced as individual units were not being priced correctly. Fixed.
  
  
• When the 'Database - Fix' option was selected, and the stock/inventory fixed. Any items with a negative quantity in stock figure would be given a total cost of 0.00, instead of a negative cost. Fixed.
  
  
• If a Purchase Order is created, any item on it that has a quantity on order of 1 or less, will not appear in the list of P/O items when entering a supplier invoice. Fixed.
  
  

v4.137 3rd March 2016

• Sales and Purchase Analysis Codes now have a 'Service' type (in addition to the 'Goods' and 'Labour'). Also, the reports breaking down transactions by analysis code can now be filtered by type.
  
  
• Both A/c Receivable and A/c Payable (Sales Ledger and Purchase Ledger) now have a 'Payments by Payment Type' report. This can analyse payment types used over any given period, producing a summary or detailing each transaction. The reports can be found in the 'Miscellaneous Reports' option in each ledger.
  
  
• Payroll, during Pay Input, if the 'Pay All Employees' button is clicked, the system will now check to make sure all employees have been processed and have payslips. If they do not, it will warn the user. Although will still allow them to proceed with paying all employees if they wish.
  
  
• In the Payroll, in employee details when listing payslips, if a payslip has not been processed/paid, the letter 'P' will appear next to the payslip date.
  
  
• Print/PDF document layouts always default to a paper size of A4, which is 210mm x 297mm. But in Canada, USA, and Mexico, the default size is 8.5" x 11" (215.9mm x 279.4mm). The accounts system will now automatically convert print/PDF layouts to the correct size for these countries (it will not change any layouts that have been edited).
  
  
• Payroll, United Kingdom only, now updated for tax year 2016/17. Please note, the NI and tax tables for the new year will be created automatically when the software is updated. But please check them to make sure they've updated correctly.
  
  
• Payroll, United Kingdom only, there is now a simple tax/NI calculator. Just below the 'Payroll' option.
  
  
• Payroll, if payslips were previewed or printed before the processing of the payroll was completed, the year to date figures for pay and tax would not include the figures for the current period. Fixed.
  
  
• Email input fields are validated, but the validation was being too strict and not allowing some characters that are actually allowable in an email address. Fixed.
  
  
• In stock item details, the 'Add Supercession' button did not work properly. It did not allow the user to select an existing stock item to be superceeded. Also, there was no button to make it easy to locate a stock item. Fixed.
  
  
• When copying document layouts in A/c Receivable (Sales Ledger), the list was not wide enough to show the full description of each layout. Fixed.
  
  

v4.135 12th January 2016

• The Profit & Loss report now has an option for printing a P&L over several years, to enable easy comparison between previous years trading.
  
  
• When entering sales invoices, the retail 'per' and cost 'per' are now mentioned in various bits of help text. As is the 'Unit of Issue' where it is not 1.00 (advanced mode only).
  
  
• In the Parts Counter in AutoManager, the list of stock items now defaults to SKU code order, and starts at the first item.
  
  
• Can now list edited transactions in all three ledgers. This new option is in Setup -> Miscellaneous.
  
  
• When viewing transaction details in the General Ledger, transactions from Accounts Receivable or Accounts Payable could be displayed as being from Sales Ledger or Purchase Ledger. Fixed.
  
  
• In AutoManager, when a part was sold via the Parts Counter the quantity should always default to the 'Unit of Issue' as setup in the stock item details. But it wasn't doing this. Fixed.
  
  
• In the Parts Counter in AutoManager, clicking on the list of parts would tend to highlight one side of the list, which didn't cause a problem for the software, but looked untidy. Fixed.
  
  
• Where very low priced stock items are priced in units other than 1 (eg. $0.15 for 10), when a sales invoice was posted, the 'price per' figure for the retail price was always assumed to be 1 in the 'Stock' tab in customer details, and in the stock movement record in the stock item details. Fixed.
  
  
• When editing a printed document layout, if the format of a number was changed, several digits would vanished off the end. making the number format shorter than intended. Fixed.
  
  

v4.134 12th December 2015

• If a period of absence is entered into the employee details, and the period is on a bank holiday, or a day when the employee does not usually work, the system will warn the user to check the dates (though won't prevent the input).
  
  
• The install/update program is now more robust. If it was running over the top of another program, clicking on some of the options could cause the install program to lose focus, and swap places with the program that was running behind it. This has now been fixed. Also, if an install failed, a 2nd attempt at installing could also fail, as it tried to create folders, some of which might already exist. It now checks to see if a folder exists, just in case there was a previous failed attempt at installation (a failed install is often due to anti-virus software).
  
  
• Sometimes in customer details, in the 'General' tab, a document could not be deleted, viewed, or edited. The necessary buttons would remain greyed out. Fixed.
  
  
• Employee Details: in the 'Holiday/Absence' tab, if an absence was being created, or an existing absence selected, and then a new employee was selected. The 'Holiday/Absence' details did not get updated to reflect the newly selected employee. Fixed.
  
  
• When viewing a delivery note to customer on screen, last three digits of the invoice number were not displayed. Fixed.
  
  
• If a Purchase Order was created, and saved as 'Not on order', and then was edited and one or more lines were deleted, some lines could end up being replicated in the P/O. Fixed.
  
  

v4.133 27th November 2015

• In the Sales Tax/VAT Period End report, adjustments, early settlements, and write offs are now itemised as such in the report.
  
  
• In the Sales Tax/VAT Period End report, in sales transactions the reference column had changed to 'Journal' instead of 'Ref.'. Fixed.
  
  

v4.132 23rd November 2015

• When using the 'Receive Stock from Supplier' option, you can now print details of the stock received.
  
  
• Some users were getting a message when installing/updating and starting up the accounts system: Can not open registry key Software\Microsoft\InternetExplorer\Main\FeatureControl|Feature_Browser_Emulation Fixed.
  
  
• When running in Basic mode, if looking at customer details, and you view transaction history, and then current transactions and there were no current transactions, if you double clicked on the first line, even though it's empty the details of the first transaction in the history would appear. Fixed.
  
  
• If the 'Change Form and Font' sizes option was used to increase the size of the fonts and forms, sales invoices would not appear correctly. The left hand characters of the item description would be hidden behind the find button, as would the customers name. Fixed.
  
  

v4.131 9th November 2015

• Reminders can now be created. Either general reminders, or customer/supplier/employee account specific.
  
  
• The graphs have all been improved. Most have a choice of bar or line graph, and the scale can be fine tuned using the mouse wheel.
  
  
• When displaying a web page within the accounts system, it uses IE, but was limited to emulating IE7. This meant an increasing number of web sites did not display properly, as IE7 does not support HTML5 and CSS3. This has now been fixed, in that it will emulate whatever version of IE you have installed, up to IE11. But it does have to write a value in the Windows Registry to do it.
  
  
• Sales Tax/VAT period end reports. In countries where there is only one type of Sales Tax/VAT, Write offs, adjustments and early settlements all appear in a separate column called 'Other'. In the UK VAT 100 report they are then added to box 1 or box 4 depending on whether they are due or being claimed, regardless of whether they originated from the Sales or Purchase Ledger. This is in accordance with HMRC requirements. In other countries, write offs, adjustments and early settlements are not separated out, but are added to the invoice/credit note figures of each relevant ledger.
  
  
• In the 'Financial Summary' background, the total for 'Cash/Bank Accounts' was not correct. This issue was also carried over to the graph showing a two year history of the total balances. Fixed.
  
  
• When a Proforma to a customers is converted into a Sales Invoice, it should say 'Yes' under the 'Invoiced' column in the list of Proforma's, but this was not happening. Also, the message 'Profroma invoice/s exist' should not appear, but it did appear. Fixed.
  
  
• When a company/organization is not registered for Sales Tax/VAT and so does not need to apply this tax, there is a setting in the company/organization details for this. However, when entering Purchase Invoices, and taking the items off Purchase Orders, tax was still being added to the invoice total. Fixed.
  
  
• In supplier details, if a default Sales Tax/VAT code was manually entered (ie. not using the 'Find' button), when the details were displayed later it could not always find the tax description. Fixed.
  
  
• When setting up a till printer, the 'OK' button would sometimes remain greyed out even though the content of all input fields were valid. User needed to tab through each input field to enable the 'OK' button. Fixed.
  
  
• A/c Receivable/Sales Ledger, Miscellaneous Reports, Profit Analysis, did not always produce the correct start and end dates when weekly, monthly, or quarterly periods were selected. The report could also end early if there were no further transactions, rather than print periods with a zero value. Fixed.
  
  

v4.129 5th September 2015

• Stock items can now be 'cloned', there is a new button in the stock item details to do this (advanced mode only).
  
  
• Purchase Invoices (in advanced mode) can now handle up to 1,000 lines (previously 100).
  
  
• When entering a payment for a cash customer after raising a sales invoice, the system will now warn the user if the payment entered is too high. Previously it just went straight to a refund screen. Which was irritating if the over payment had been entered in error.
  
  
• The credit check option only worked in the United Kingdom, it will now work in most countries. The check is only based on the company name though. Checks using the company number are still limited to the UK.
  
  
• Archiving customer or supplier account records is now done from a field in the account details screen that just needs clicking. Rather than changing the status of the account, which mean't the status was then lost when it was archived.
  
  
• There are now options in the set up menus for archiving customer and supplier accounts 'wholesale'. The option is called 'Accounts Archive/Un-archive'. It allows you to archive accounts with no activity after a given period. The option can also be used to un-archive all accounts, and list archived accounts.
  
  
• When listing Purchase Orders in the supplier details screen (wide version), the 'Authorized' column would show a number instead of the initials or code of the person who authorized the Purchase Order. Fixed.
  
  
• When creating a Purchase Order, only the first 100 items would be totalled. A P/O can handle up to 1,000 items. Fixed.
  
  
• Payroll, Additions/Deductions setup, if the form was dragged, not all fields moved to accommodate the new form size. Fixed.
  
  
• Supplier details, if a supplier account was linked to a customer account, clicking on the customer name displayed did not bring up the customers details. Fixed.
  
  
• General Stock Report, the quantity sold and value of those sales did not total up. Fixed.
  
  
• General Stock Report, when stock items were filtered by a numeric value such as quantity in stock, or sales year to date, etc. The report would not output the stock items as per the filter. Fixed.
  
  
• Purchase Orders would still add Sales Tax/VAT to the total even if the accounts system was set to not handle Sales Tax/VAT. Fixed.
  
  
• In AutoManager, you could not create new job/service types if the company/organization was set to being not registered for Sales Tax/VAT. Fixed.
  
  

v4.127 27th July 2015

• New option provided in the 'Help' menu for users to apply to become a member of the User Forum. The option used to be in the web site itself, but had to be removed due to the amount of spam (people joining the forum and filling it with links to their web sites).
  
  
• New option in the 'General' menu for adding/maintaining general images. ie. images that are not for any specific account or transaction.
  
  
• New option in the 'General' menu for adding/created general documents. These are documents that are not associated with any particular account ro transaction. Such as credit application forms, terms and conditions, etc. It's just a handy place to store documents that may get used on a regular basis.
  
  
• Sales Invoices can now have images scanned in or located and attached to the transaction, the same as Purchase Invoices. This option is not available when running the software in 'Basic' mode.
  
  
• Payments and Receipts and Journal Entries in the General Ledger (Nominal Ledger) can now have images scanned in or located and attached to the transaction.
  
  
• When creating a new Purchase Order, if Preview is selected with the output set to 'View (Text)', a preview of the Purchase Order would be displayed, but from that display if the user then clicked on the print button the application could crash. Fixed.
  
  
• When a company/organization is not registered for VAT/Sales Tax, supplier invoices still allowed a VAT/Sales Tax code to be entered, although it wasn't processed. Fixed.
  
  
• Early Settlement transactions in A/c. Payable (Purchase Ledger) required a reference to be entered even though it indicated this was not necessary. Fixed.
  
  
• Sales Invoices, when invoicing from stock, if there were no items in stock it would not produce a cost for the stock item, even if there was a 'LIST' cost it could have used. It may initially display a cost, but that cost would be zeroised when the invoice was posted. Fixed.
  
  
• In AutoManager - Parts Counter, you could not always click on a cost item in the invoice to re-display the cost details. Fixed.
  
  
• The database integrity check indicated there were errors with transaction allocations, when in fact there were none. Fixed.
  
  

v4.126 17th July 2015

• Supplier Invoices, Credit Notes and Debit Notes, have had the 'Description of item/service' section of each line increased from a maximum of 50 characters length to 90 characters. Note, if you need to print any of these documents, the 'Description of item/service' may get truncated. Output to HTML will not be truncated.
  
  
• Images can now be added to jobs in AutoManager.
  
  
• Document Layout Editor can be too deep for some monitors, making it impossible for users to edit layouts with large headers or footers. For technical reasons, a scroll bar can not be added. But instead there are now two controls, one that can move the whole form around the screen (ie. similar to clicking and dragging the top of the form, but this control is central), and the other for moving the layout editor section up or down within the form. While not perfect, it should allow any layout to be edited on just about any size monitor.
  
  
• A 'Payment to Terms Analysis' report has been added for both customers and suppliers, so you can more easily monitor if customers are taking too long to pay, and of course whether you're paying your suppliers on time.
  
  
• The maximum number of characters available for the input of email and web addresses varies between 40, 50, and 60 characters. All these input fields have now been standardized to 60 characters.
  
  
• New option listing supercessions added to stock control menu. You can remove and/or redirect supercessions from this list.
  
  
• In the 'Letters/Faxes' section of customer accounts, supplier accounts, and employee details, you can now add any type of document file.
  
  
• When creating a Credit Note or Debit Note for a supplier, the 'Purchase Orders' tab would be enabled, when it is not actually required for those transactions. Fixed.
  
  
• When editing a supplier invoice, if the Sales Tax/VAT code was changed, but the user did not move out of the Sales Tax/VAT input field but clicked on the 'OK' button straight away, the tax records did not get updated. Fixed.
  
  
• When setting up a till, the till float cash account defaulted to sales a/c 4000. Fixed.
  
  
• Copying a document layout to/from another company/organization often did not work. Fixed.
  
  
• If a stock item has one or more supercessions pointing to it, and is merged with another item, the supercessions are not updated. So if the item with the supercessions is the one that loses it's identity, any items superseding to it now go no where. Fixed.
  
  
• When a default cash payment code was set up in A/c Receivable (Sales Ledger), it was not automatically selected when entering the payment for a sales invoice on a cash account. Fixed.
  
  
• The General Ledger (Nominal Ledger) would allow transactions that had been processed for a Sales Tax/VAT period end to be edited or deleted. Fixed.
  
  
• When listing special customer prices for stock items, the 'Print List' option did not work. Fixed.
  
  

v4.124 11th May 2015

• It is now possible to activate Skype directly from within the accounts system for messaging, voice calls, or video calls. This is in the 'Additional Contact Information' in customer and supplier account details and contact details.
  
  
• Both the aged creditor and aged debtor reports are now formatted better when output to a spreadsheet from the reports option. This does not apply to printing directly from the on-screen aged creditor/debtor forms.
  
  
• General Ledger/Nominal Ledger accounts can now be archived. As nothing is deleted, they can be un-archived at any time.
  
  
• It is now possible to exclude some sales tax/VAT codes from the tax/VAT period end report. This is setup in the tax table setup option. The tax rate/s must be zero.
  
  
• When printing a cash/bank statement for an account that is not in the ledger currency, the statement would always print in the ledger currency, regardless of the currency selected for displaying the statement. Fixed.
  
  
• The email forms would not accept more than one email address in the 'To', 'CC' and 'BCC' input fields. Fixed.
  
  
• Payroll, UK only, employee details would not accept NI letter 'M'. Fixed.
  
  
• Employee details, if an ex-employee was viewed, followed by a current employee, the message 'Not a current employee' would remain on screen. Fixed.
  
  

v4.122 12th March 2015

• General Stock Report, new fields added: commission amount, retail price per, cost price per, CN code, sales tax/VAT code, and quantity on order.
  
  
• It is no longer possible to delete sales or purchase transactions that have been processed for a sales tax/VAT period end. Previously, the system would simply warn users, but allow them to do it anyway. Now the delete button remains greyed out. However, it is still possible to delete a transaction in the 'Setup' menu using one of the 'Change Transaction Details' options. As it is appreciated that occasionally a user may need to delete a transaction regardless.
  
  
• The 'Tel.' and 'Fax.' input fields in both the customer and supplier details are now user definable. Fax machines are rarely used these days, so users may find it particularly useful to change the description of those input fields.
  
  
• When editing a document layout, if the layout was already open by another process (perhaps a print pre-view), or another user, when the layout was saved, the data items in it could double up. Now, if the layout is already open, the layout editor will not open it.
  
  
• In an 'Invoice Receipt' had one or more images associated with it, and the transaction was edited, the images would be lost. Fixed.
  
  
• General Stock Report, the retail price each was not always the price each, as it didn't take the 'price per' into account. The same applied to the cost each, unless there were items in stock, then it was calculated correctly based on actual cost. Fixed.
  
  
• When an adjustment was entered for a stock item reducing the quantity in stock, the SKU and description would not appear in the 'Stock Movements' option in the 'Lists' section of the menu. Fixed.
  
  
• AutoManager, Service Counter, when a stock item that is in stock was selected and booked to the job, the sales figures and stock movement for that item did not update correctly. Fixed.
  
  

v4.121 16th February 2015

• When editing journals, if you change the description or department code, it will now ask you if you want each line of journal changed as well. It will also do this when entering a new journal if you click back up into the description or department field and change the contents.
  
  
• Payroll - United Kingdom only - now modified for the tax year 2015-16.
  
  
• The Purchase Order list now has an extra option to list all orders except those that have been canceled.
  
  
• When any new account is being created, if the details are insufficient, or some codes are incorrect, if the user clicks the 'OK' button, the software will now ask if they want to quit the account without saving. Users have previously clicked on the 'OK button, even though 'Save' is greyed out, and assumed the account details have been saved. So this should avoid some confusion.
  
  
• Supplier details when reported in full, now print out the suppliers bank details.
  
  
• The Stock Take report now has an option to include the extra description fields in the report.
  
  
• When supplier details selected from the toolbar, the 'New' button in the supplier details form was greyed out. Fixed.
  
  
• The Data Integrity Check did not take into account stock that was booked out to a job, or returned from a job when checking stock item sales figures. Fixed.
  
  
• When creating a P/O, in the 'Details' section the text on the buttons for finding customer and supplier addresses was missing, and replaced by an image. Making it impossible to know what the buttons are for. Fixed.
  
  
• Purchase Orders, when copying an order, if the original was left on screen and the copy saved, any changes made to the original at that time would then get saved to the copy. Fixed.
  
  
• When parts were ordered for a job via a P/O created from the service counter in AutoManager, the sales figures for the part were not updated correctly when the part was received and automatically booked out to the job. Fixed.
  
  
• When creating a Purchase Order, if it was saved as 'Not ordered' and then loaded up again, if it was edited and then previewed, the edited data would not be saved. Fixed.
  
  
• Asset Register, when printing the list, the last few digits of the 'Book Value' would not be printed, or the 'Book Value' would not be printed at all if it was a very low amount. Fixed.
  
  

v4.120 2nd February 2015

• The reports that analyse sales or purchases by country/area have been improved. It is now possible to analyse sales or purchases by country and then by sales or purchase code. So you can see what kind of items/service you are selling or buying into each area/country.
  
  
• Payment types for both customer and supplier transactions can now have a default payment type code.
  
  
• New report added to Purchase Order Processing that lists stock items on order (actually selectable by order date and status of the Purchase Order, so it doesn't have to show only items currently on order).
  
  
• Although manually uninstalling Adminsoft Accounts is very easy (just delete the folder and any shortcuts), there is now an uninstall option. Click on 'Setup' on the top menu bar, go down to 'System', and the option 'Uninstall Adminsoft Accounts' is the last one in the menu.
  
  
• When editing the A/c Payable (Purchase Ledger) defaults and variables, when the settings are saved the next remittance advice number would get overwritten by the next transaction number. Fixed.
  
  
• When allocating a payment to a supplier or from a customer, if any other transactions (such as other payments or credit notes) were picked up during the allocation process, allocated and then dropped (ie. removed from the allocation process), it was possible to over allocate. In other words, to allocate a greater amount than was actually available. Fixed.
  
  

v4.118 6th January 2015

• Sales invoices, when an invoice is created using items from stock, the costs of those items is shown in the invoice (when running in Level 2). However, in a fast moving environment, the costs can change between entering the item in the invoice and actually posting the invoice. Particularly if the invoice was saved, and then perhaps posted a few hours or a few days later. Now the system will re-cost stock items at the time the invoice is posted. So costs should be correct, but it does mean the profit you thought you were making on a sale when you raised the invoice may change.
  
  
• The help text available when a user click the 'Help' button uses Internet Explorer to display the actual text, which is in HTML. The browser is incorporated into Adminsoft Accounts. However, some PC's are unable to do this, possibly due to Windows or anti-virus security settings. So there is now an option in the user record ('Maintain Users', select user, click the 'General' tab) to use Adminsoft Accounts own software to render the HTML (this is a lot slower than IE, but at least it will always work).
  
  
• Option added to edit the software registration details, should your address or email address change. The option can be found in the 'License Details' in the 'Help' menu.
  
  
• General Stock report when output to Excel or Calc, the numeric fields in the spreadsheet would actually be entered as character fields. Preventing any calculations on them. Fixed.
  
  
• When editing a sales invoice when using COGS, the COGS postings could use the original item costs instead of the correct item costs. Fixed.
  
  
• When Sales Tax/VAT facility has been disabled (in Company/Organization Details), the 'Money Received (Multiple)' and 'Money Paid Out (Multiple)' options did not work. Fixed.
  
  
• Some General Ledger (Nominal Ledger) reports referred to the 'Journal' reference number as the 'TranNo'. Fixed.
  
  
• Stock/Inventory Control, when making a kit, only the first stock item in the list of items that make up a kit would have it's quantity reduced or a stock movement created. Fixed.
  
  
• Stock/Inventory Control, returning stock to a supplier updated quantity in stock correctly, but did not update the movement file (age of stock) correctly.
  
  
• AutoManager - Service Counter, when a stock item had to be purchased for a specific job, when it came in, it's booked into stock and out to the job automatically. But the stock movement record showing the item coming into stock, still showed the item as in stock, even though the actual quantity in stock figure showed the correct stock level. Also, the stock item sales figures were not updated. Fixed.
  
  

v4.117 21st November 2014

• General Ledger transactions that have been processed for the Sales Tax/VAT period end could still be edited, from some screens. Fixed. (note: where sales or purchase transactions have been processed for a tax period end, the journals generated by those transactions can still be edited or deleted, as it's the original transactions that appeared in the tax report and not the journals)
  
  
• Sales Analysis by Area/Country report can now produce a summary, just listing each area/country and the total sales.
  
  
• When updating existing software, there is now an option to make a full copy of the existing installation, prior to the actual update. Beware though, there is no guarantee this will work, because if there is a problem during the update, that same problem (usually anti-virus software) could also prevent it from creating the backup. If the installation program realizes there's a problem, it will give you the opportunity to abort prior to the actual update.
  
  
• When processing the Sales Tax/VAT period end, if the 'Display Summary' was run before the full report, the full report would not show a 'From' date. Although it did use the correct dates. Fixed.
  
  
• When building stock kits, the movement record for the items used to construct the kits did not contain the stock code or description. Fixed.
  
  
• The 'Invoice Receipt' option in supplier details would display the text 'VAT Amount' or 'GST Amount' or something similar, instead of 'Total'. Fixed.
  
  
• When entering a supplier invoice, if an accrual/prepayment is also entered, and then the amount each is edited, the accrual/prepayment amount was not updated to reflect the edit. Now it automatically goes back into the accrual/prepayment option.
  
  
• Printing a supplier credit note, it document would say 'Invoice' at the top and 'Debit note' further down for the reference number. Fixed.
  
  
• Sales invoice, if a delivery address other than the account address was used, after saving and posting, when the invoice was re-loaded, the account address would be displayed instead of the selected delivery address. Although the correct delivery address would be in the actual record. This would get over written if the invoice was edited. Fixed.
  
  
• Sales Invoices (when running in Level 2 only), if an invoice was created for a cash customer, and then posted, but no cash payment entered at that time, and the invoice remained on screen, if the user got out of the invoice by clicking on 'OK', the costs would lose their sales analysis code. This meant if the invoice was subsequently edited, and any of the sales analysis codes used COGS, the COGS would not be re posted. Fixed.
  
  
• Purchase invoices, if a factor was used, once the invoice was saved and posted, when the invoice was re-loaded, the factor would no longer be selected. Although the factor would still be correctly in the invoice data record. This would get over written if the invoice was edited. Fixed.
  
  

v4.116 17th October 2014

• Form and screen images as now saved as JPG instead of BMP. JPG files are smaller.
  
  
• There are now options to print form and screen images. If an image is more than 800 pixels wide it'll print in landscape. But if it's more than about 1,000 pixels wide (only a few forms are over 1,000 pixels wide) the right hand side will bleed off the paper.
  
  
• When in the print/PDF document layout screen, the default layout setting is now shown in the list of available layouts.
  
  
• Purchase Orders, when creating an order, it did not always pickup up the cost price of an item. Fixed.
  
  
• When saving a form image (Help->Save Form Image), it would save an image of the accounts system instead. Fixed.
  
  
• The 'Analysis: Sales by Area/Country' report in the 'Miscellaneous Reprts' option did not always print out the country of the accounts listed. Fixed. It also now sub-totals for each country.
  
  
• When running a Sales Tax/VAT period end, although adjustments transactions would appear in the report, they did not get processed, and so if they involved a tax element they would keep appearing in subsequent reports. Early Settlement transactions did not appear in the report or get processed. Fixed.
  
  
• The option that allowed users to report bugs or possible bugs from within the software had vanished. Fixed. (Oh, the irony.....)
  
  

v4.115 7th October 2014

• When most sales or purchase transactions are displayed, a single left click on the customer or supplier name will bring up the account details.
  
  
• Purchase Order Processing, costing method used when there is no supplier part record now uses setting in 'Purchase Defaults and Variables' option, rather than the stock setting.
  
  
• There is now a report showing the depreciation figures and book value for assets.
  
  
• Document Layouts for print/PDF, the horizontal and vertical cursor position within the layout area is now displayed in the top left hand corner.
  
  
• Receipts produced by AutoManager are are formatted better.
  
  
• Bank/Cash statements can now display transactions in either ascending or descending order.
  
  
• When entering sales invoices, credit notes, advice notes, etc. an action can be selected telling the software what to do in the event the user does not enter a description to help identify the transaction. This can be the first line of text in the invoice, the first sales analysis code, or the description of the first sales analysis code.
  
  
• Receipts produced by AutoManager would print "** NOT PAID ***" when in fact the sale had been paid. The sales tax/VAT did not print correctly. Also, if displayed instead of being sent to a printer, they often would not then print. Fixed.
  
  
• Cash/Bank statements, if set to reconcile any related accounts, the statement would display the wrong transactions when moved forwards or backwards a period. Fixed.
  
  
• Backing up via email, FTP, or to a ZIP file, if both data and docs were selected for backup, and the company/organization data was not held in the default location, it would fail. Fixed.
  
  
• When editing Purchase Orders, or adding items to an existing order, it would put the Sales Analysis code into the Purchase Analysis code input field. Fixed.
  
  
• When editing Purchase Orders, if user tabbed through the stock code field, it would update the cost input field - which in most cases should not be updated automatically. Fixed.
  
  
• When entering an invoice for a supplier, if no account was selected, the focus still went to the first 'Quantity' input field instead of the suppliers account code input field. Fixed.
  
  
• Trading Report, the accounts listed under Expenses and Overheads didn't always match those listed in the Profit and Loss report. They should, provided the Purchase Analysis codes are well maintained. Fixed. (the actual figures will seldom balance of course, because of the nature of the Trading Report)
  
  
• Payroll, United Kingdom only, if an FPS is late, when the 'Check Data' button is clicked it would display a warning that a reason for late submission should be selected, even though a reason is already selected (by default). Fixed.
  
  
• Transaction allocation report for supplier accounts, the transaction value had the last digit missing. Fixed.
  
  
• Stock adjustments, when decreasing stock, it would not take the cost from the oldest item (if using FIFO), or newest item (if LIFO). Fixed.
  
  
• When producing workshop invoices from the AutoManager module, if the discount percentage for an item appeared in the invoice on each line, it would print ***.**. Fixed.
  
  
• Cash/bank accounts, any future postings that have been deleted would get included in the list showing 'todays' balance. Fixed.
  
  
• Cash/bank accounts, the figures in the 'Revaluation' option included any future postings, instead of showing the balance as at 'today'. Fixed.
  
  
• Outputting a list to clipboard, Word, Writer, HTML or text file would truncate some data on the right hand side if the list was wide. Fixed.
  
  

v4.112 2nd September 2014

• In the 'Stock' tab in customer details (in level 2 only), there is a new button 'Special Prices'. This will list any special prices that have been set up for the selected customer. You can also edit and/or add new prices from this list. If using wide customer details form, the special prices will appear as a new tab called 'Prices', to the right of the 'Stock' tab.
  
  
• There is a new option to list all customer special prices in the stock/inventory menu.
  
  
• Purchase Orders can now be edited. Although this feature is disabled by default. So to allow editing, click on 'Setup' on the top menu bar, go to 'Order Processing', and select 'Purchase Defaults and Variables'.
  
  
• Customer accounts, a delivery address can now be set as the default. The default delivery address will then be automatically selected when creating sales invoices.
  
  
• Supplier accounts, a factor can now be set as the default factor. This factor will then be used automatically when creating opening balances or entering invoices and credit notes.
  
  
• Stock Item Details, the list of stock movements (wide version of the form only) now displays the cost each and remaining quantity of each movement of stock in. So users basing costs on FIFO can more easily see where the costs are coming from.
  
  
• Cash/Bank statement, the default date range is now selectable in the General Ledger (Nominal Ledger) 'Defaults and Variables' option in setup.
  
  
• Cash/Bank statement, when reconciling transactions, it is now possible to set the system so that any related cash/bank transactions are also reconciled. The setting is in 'Defaults and Variables'.
  
  
• If an image is used in a print or PDF layout, the image file needs to exist at the time the document is printed. Now, if the image file is not available, the reference to the image is automatically removed from the layout so that it does not prevent the document from printing. A message will appear to let the user know.
  
  
• When a new company/organization is created, the new set of ledgers will default to using layouts suitable for plain paper when printing documents, Previously, some documents, including invoices would default to using a layout for letter headed paper. But users now either use plain paper, or more usually no paper at all.
  
  
• When editing print/PDF document layouts, data item properties will now remain fully within the application's visible screen, regardless of the screen space available to it. Also, the layout editor itself will not adjust it's size beyond the available screen, even if that means not showing all of the document layout.
  
  
• Payroll: If a date was entered into the 'Date left' input field in employee details, the employee would no longer be listed in any employee lists, as they were no longer a current employee. Now they will continue to appear if they are still associated with a payroll. The 'Payroll' input field must be set to 'Not on payroll' for the employee to be removed from lists of current employees.
  
  
• Stock Item kit list, if the form is dragged wider, Bill of Materials will appear to the right. This also appears if the kit details are printed (the print will be in landscape format due to width).
  
  
• If running the system in Level 1, and a customer or supplier account has Early Settlement Discount (which can only be set/viewed when running in Level 2), this will be automatically applied to any invoices entered for that account.
  
  
• When validating email addresses, it would allow a space in the email address. Fixed.
  
  
• When adding a new user, clicking on 'Security Profile' without saving the new user record first would create a 'User not found?' message. Fixed.
  
  
• Customer details, delivery addresses, the delete button did not work. Fixed.
  
  
• Supplier Details (in the 'wide' version of the form), the 'Print List' button in various lists did did not print the value or full value of a transaction, order, or item.. Fixed.
  
  
• Putting a supplier invoice into dispute failed. Fixed.
  
  
• If an Early Settlement Discount transaction was selected for a supplier, that was in a closed account period, a message could appear twice informing the user the date was not valid. Fixed.
  
  
• Early Settlement Discount for both sales and purchase invoices was not always calculated correctly. Fixed.
  
  
• eMail shots: the 'Test' button didn't work properly. It would send out one test email to the test email address for every email address in the 'live' list! It wouldn't send a test email at all if there were no emails in the list. Fixed.
  
  
• When deleting a supplier invoice, if it had any accruals or prepayments associated with it, they would not be automatically deleted. Fixed.
  
  

v4.109 24th July 2014

• Editing purchase invoices would sometimes cause the invoice to be duplicated. Fixed.
  
  
• When editing account periods, the 'Close/Open a Whole Year' button did not always work. Fixed.
  
  

v4.108 10th July 2014

• New output option is available for all reports, lists, and documents, called 'Print Select'. This opens Windows own printer select dialogue. It's useful when selecting network printers, It should also allow you access to the printers setup options.
  
  
• When using the list transactions, for either sales or purchases, if the 'Daybook Report' option is selected, the to/from dates and other information is automatically passed to the report option so it will print the transactions displayed.
  
  
• List transactions and daybook reports for both sales and purchases did not allow the listing of 'Early Settlement Discount' only. This feature has now been added.
  
  
• AutoManager, when parts are ordered specially, received, and then booked out to a job, the quantity in stock shows the parts received, but not having been booked out. Fixed.
  
  

v4.107 5th July 2014

• Aged Creditors and Debtors can now display and print for a specific department (the default is for all departments).
  
  
• Aged Creditors and Debtors can now display and print showing analysis by calendar month, as well as the standard 30 day, 60 day, etc.
  
  
• Customer and supplier accounts can now be set up with a default department that over rides the ledgers general default department when entering transactions.
  
  
• Print/PDF layouts, each data item automatically sizes to take account of the data it is to print and font type and size used. However, the autosize doesn't always work as well as it should, and sometimes character fields can get truncated (one or two characters missing off the end), and numeric data fields can end up printing '*******' instead of a number. To avoid this, it is now possible to turn off the autosize feature on a data item and manually set the width and height of the field.
  
  
• In the 'General' drop down menu, there is a new report option: 'Report User Activity Analysis'. This will produce an analysis showing how many transactions in each ledger have been created, edited, and deleted by selected users over a given date range.
  
  
• Customer, supplier, and General Ledger (Nominal Ledger) accounts can now be deleted, and then viewed in a 'List Deleted Accounts' option in the 'Miscellaneous' menu in 'Setup'. They can be undeleted.
  
  
• The 'Database - Re-index' option now has an option of physically removing deleted accounts. By default this option is not selected.
  
  
• General Ledger (Nominal Ledger), entering recurring journals no longer requires a department code to be entered, it's now optional.
  
  
• General Ledger (Nominal Ledger), transaction details didn't show the debit/credit figures correctly for the selected transaction. Fixed.
  
  
• AutoManager, when ordering parts for a particular job, if the quantity on the order was increased, when the parts were received none were not booked out to the job. Fixed.
  
  
• AutoManager, when ordering parts for a particular job, if an item was added to the purchase order with a 'Sell Price' of zero (such as the suppliers courier charge), it still got added to the job. Fixed.
  
  

v4.106 26th June 2014

• The 'Preferred payment method' in supplier details was only being used when remittance advices were created, it was no used when entering individual payments. Fixed.
  
  
• When a Sales Invoice is edited, any items that were invoiced from stock that have the quantity changed put 'todays' date into the stock movement record instead of the transaction date. Fixed
  
  
• Cost of Goods not being posted from the AutoManager module (bug crept into v4.105). Fixed.
  
  
• Supplier details (Level 2 only), in the list of 'Orders' the 'List Invoice Status' button wasn't working correctly. Fixed.
  
  
• In the database fix option (in setup), the 'Correct General Stock Data' button would fix any problems in the stock data, but it also created a big one by removing the cross reference to any suppliers. This bug must have been there for quite some time. Fixed.
  
  
• Purchase Invoices, when one or more items are selected from the list of P/O's, the P/O number did not appear on the right hand side of the invoice details unless the form was scrolled. Fixed.
  
  

v4.104 2nd June 2014

• List Proforma Invoices: now has an option to only list those that have not been invoiced.
  
  
• The background options 'Money Received (Multiple)' and 'Money Paid Out (Multiple)' can now have the account code typed into the 'Payment received for' and 'Reason for Payment' input fields, in the same way as the cash/bank account input field. The drop down selection is still there, of course.
  
  
• Profit & Loss report now prints the period name at the top of each column instead of just the period number.. Useful when reporting multiple periods.
  
  
• In the account periods set up screen, there is now a button 'Check Periods' that will make sure all the account periods are contiguous, with no missing or overlapping dates.
  
  
• When not running as Freeware, user can now right click on the 'Background Picture' and select an image of their choice.
  
  
• Sales Invoices, when a stock item is not controlled, if the user entered the item into the invoice and then entered the quantity (usually, it would be he other way around), they would get a message saying 'Not enough stock'. Fixed.
  
  
• Sales Invoices, if a stock item is set to zero value, and the Sale Analysis code includes COGS accounts, they are not posted to in that instance. Fixed.
  
  
• If a sales invoice was edited, then 'Print and Post' selected, and the invoice is setup to remain on the screen after posting, and the user then clicks on the 'OK' button, it would double up the items in the invoice (clicking on 'Cancel' would not). Fixed. Note: the only way to correct invoices this has happened to is to clear all deleted sales transactions, then delete the invoice, and then re-enter it.
  
  
• Whole invoice discount given on sales invoices was not showing in the Trading Report. Fixed.
  
  
• Data Integrity report was not taking whole invoice discounts into account, and was also not correctly checking payment allocations on the sales side. Fixed.
  
  
• If the cost of some stock items in a kit is extremely low, it would not display the correct anticipated kit cost due to rounding issues. Fixed.
  
  
• Batched input of supplier invoices and credit notes would say 'A/c. Receivable' or 'Sales Ledger' along the top. Fixed.
  
  
• The 'Cash Flow Statement Groups' in the Setup menu, 'Operating Activities' would shown up as 'Unknown?'. Fixed.
  
  

v4.104 2nd June 2014

• New report available showing which customer transaction is allocated to which. This is printed for individual customers.
  
  
• New report available showing which supplier transaction is allocated to which. This is printed for individual suppliers.
  
  
• Diary entries now have a report button to print the diary details (of existing diary entries).
• Stock Control: Sales Analysis report, the total retail value and cost value figures have been widened to 999,999,999.99, there is now an option to produce a profit figure, and the report produces totals at the bottom.
  
  
• Print/PDF and HTML document layouts now contain the 'quantity per' data field used when the 'price each' is actually for several items. This covers sales invoices, estimates, proforma invoices, and advice notes.
  
  
• Print/PDF layouts now contain a data item called 'PAID' that gets printed on an invoice that has been fully paid. The actual text can be edited.
  
  
• Stock item detail (in Level 1), if an a new item is entered and saved, and then a different stock item is selected, the details of the selected item did not appear. Fixed.
  
  
• Stock item details (in Level 2), if a new item was being entered, and then the 'Clear' button clicked to abandon the new item, when a stock item was next selected, most of the tabs would remain greyed out. Fixed.
  
  

v4.102 22nd May 2014

• AutoManager: Service counter option would not start. Fixed.
  
  
• The list of various Charts of Accounts (used if creating a new set of ledgers for a new company/organization) was lost when updating to v4.100. Fixed.
  
  

v4.101 20th May 2014

• For those not using the software as freeware, the background has been changed. The 'Sponsor' tab has been replaced by plain(ish) background. The user can select their own image (in the user details).
  
  
• The new simple system for customer discounts is now implemented in sales invoices when running the accounts system in 'Basic' mode.
  
  
• Bank reconciliation button remained greyed out when using the wide version of the bank/cash statement form. Fixed.
  
  
• General Ledger (Nominal Ledger) account details, when single left clicking in the 'Transactions by Period' section, the list of transactions making up the balance did not appear on in the list on the right hand side (in the wider version of the form). Fixed.
  
  
• Repeat sales invoices did not update stock when posted. Fixed.
  
  
• When allocation a payment received from a customer, the 'Use Transaction Date' button didn't work. Fixed.
  
  
• Purchase Order Processing: When stock is received in a Purchase Order, the supplier would be added to the list of suppliers for that stock item, even if the supplier already existed in the list. Fixed.
  
  
• AutoManager: Parts counter, when a cash sale is made, the customer's outstanding balance was not maintained correctly. This balance isn't actually used in the accounts system (itt adds up the transaction balances each time). But the data integrity check would display it as in error, which understandably concerned users. Fixed.
  
  
• AutoManager: Parts counter sales list would display a digit in front of the account code in the list instead of the initials of the sales representative. Fixed.
  
  
• Payroll, UK only, EPS would fail if there has been any SSP paid. Fixed.
  
  

v4.100 12th May 2014

• Almost all forms were limited to 800 pixels wide. This was to ensure the accounts system would run on as many PC's as possible. However, as monitors are getting wider, with high resolutions, the 800 pixel forms now look quite small. So some forms, such as invoices,account details, etc. are now much wider, up to 1400 pixels. However, the 800 pixel wide forms are still there, and will be used automatically where the accounts system is running in a window less than 1400 pixels wide (this can be changed by the user).
  
  
• Most forms, especially those over 800 pixels wide (see above) will now accept the input and will display numbers up to 999,999,999,999.99 (up from 999,999,999.99).
  
  
• When data was backed up, it would not copy the document layouts as part of the standard backup. Which could result in edited layouts being lost if a hard disk failed, or the application was transferred to another PC by installing a new copy of Adminsoft Accounts and restoring a backup. Document layouts are now no longer system wide, but specific to the selected company/organization, and so get backed up as part of a standard data backup.
  
  
• In Print/PDF document layouts, you can now add user email address, full user name, and user ID to the document layout.
  
  
• There have been a number of minor improvements to the facility to edit print/PDF document layouts. Numbers are now right justified, which makes it easier to get them in the correct position them in the layout. Each data item in the 'Line Details' section of the layout now shows two lines in the 'Header' section for lining up, a green one showing the starting position of the data item, and a red one showing the end of it.
  
  
• Sales invoices can now have an overriding single discount percentage or amount applied to them. A default discount percentage can be entered into the customer details if particular customers always get a certain discount. This works in addition to the system of discount/markup bands and sales discount codes. So care needs to be taken in that stock items that carry a discount could end up being discounted twice, this can be used to advantage in that some items could in effect be given extra discount if they are 'end of line', or soiled goods, etc.
  
  
• When a transaction was posted, if one of the elements didn't have a valid General Ledger (Nominal Ledger) account code the posting would not balance (a message would appear telling the user). Now it will post to the suspense account (if available) instead. Keeping the ledger in balance, and allowing the user to easily correct the problem afterwards.
  
  
• If the software was re-indexed when the 'Getting Started' form was still visible (this appears automatically after installation), the re-index would say there was 1 file it could not re-index. The same could happen when the software has been updated, and the database structures are being checked. Fixed.
  
  
• If the data for a company/organization was remote (ie. not situated in a sub-folder in the 'Adminsoft Accounts' folder), there could be an issue with document layouts that have been edited. Only the PC on which the layout was edited and set as default would be able to use the layout, Fixed.
  
  

v4.094 4th April 2014

• Bug report option in the Help menu stopped working, due to recent change of FTP address. Fixed.
  
  
• Payroll, UK only: a YTD LEL figure was reported in the FPS even if there were no employee NI payments during the year. Fixed.
  
  
• Payroll, UK only: the YTD LEL figure in the FPS was sometimes reporting in pounds.pence where as it should only be reporting in whole pounds. Fixed.
  
  
• Payroll, UK only: the student loan deductions in the FPS were sometimes reporting in pounds.pence where as they should only be reporting in whole pounds. Fixed.
  
  

v4.092 1st April 2014

• Remittances Advices: transactions could not be selected properly, and the payment did not allocate when the Remittance Advice was paid. Fixed.
  
  
• Payroll, UK only: when an employee changed NI codes part way through the year, the FPS did not rpeort the YTD gross pay correctly for either the old or new NI code. Fixed.
  
  
• Payroll, UK only: the LEL to PT pay band reported in FPS was not correct (the amount of NI calculated was correct). Fixed (but not retrospectively)
  
  
• Payroll, UK only: last FPS of the tax year requires the answers to some questions that are then sent to HMRC. However, the answers were not recorded properly in the accounts system. Fixed.
  
  

v4.090 22nd March 2014

• When a Purchase Order was created, the supplier would be added to the list of associated suppliers for any items on that order, even if the supplier was already associated. Fixed.
  
  
• The Sales and Purchase tax analysis reports, when showing item details and output is to a spreadsheet, would not format the item details correctly.
  
  

v4.089 17th March 2014

• Manually setting up account periods has been modified so it is no longer possible to create duplicate account periods.
  
  
• The 'Plain with Logo' background selection has been replaced with a web page that allows the user to purchase the software or make a donation. The logo that was on that background has now moved to the 'Plain' background.
  
  
• United Kingdom only: payroll RTI updated for new tax year 2014-15.
  
  
• Accessing some web sites in the accounts system background could cause a script error, which would some times interfere with the operation of the accounts Program. It could even cause the program to hang if the user clicked 'Yes' on the script error message. Fixed.
  
  
• The 'Send Stock Back to Supplier' form did not allow the lines to scroll. Fixed.
  
  
• In 'Analysis' in Stock Item Details (when running in Level 2), the profit and margin were incorrect. Fixed.
  
  
• Backup via email option did Not work if Outlook selected as email client. Fixed.
  
  

v4.088 3rd March 2014

• The front section of email addresses will now accept the + character. This is for users who send email via Google's Gmail, and want to use task apps.
  
  
• In the database fixing option, if stock was fixed, if a stock item was showing a negative total stock figure, it would calculate a cost, where as the cost should be zero. Fixed.
  
  
• Vehicle Mileage report not working properly. Fixed.
  
  
• When editing a sales or purchase invoice (in Level 2) that was paid or partly paid, it would not unallocate any transactions allocated to it, generating a warning message. Fixed.
  
  
• When importing stock data, if you created a new definition for an import file, it wouldn't work. Fixed.
  
  
• In AutoManager, changing the status of a job form the Service Counter screen caused the program to lock up. Fixed.
  
  

v4.085 8th February 2014

• It was not possible to email documents such as invoices, statements, etc. using Outlook. Fixed.
  
  
• If Outlook (using Adminsoft Accounts email editor) was selected as the email system for a user, it could fail if no SMTP host was provided. Even though the Outlook setting does not require an SMTP host (it uses the settings in Outlook). Fixed.
  
  

v4.084 5th February 2014

• Diary entries can now have have images scanned in (or existing images located) and saved with the diary entry.
  
  
• Purchase Invoices (Full): If no description was entered, the 'Suppliers Ref.' was put into the description. This change was made in v4.078. But this resulted in the suppliers reference then appearing twice when invoices were listed. So it's now been put back to how it was, so if no description is provided, it will now use the description from the first line of the invoice.
  
  
• When creating or editing sales or purchase invoices, if the calculated tax amount is edited by the user it could easily get overwritten, as the software frequently re-calculates the tax amounts. Now, after a tax edit, before the tax is re-calculated, the software will ask the user first.
  
  
• General Stock Report: 'Price Each' added to the 'Movements' section.
  
  
• The list 'All Transactions' option for customers and suppliers, now has an extra option to only display current transactions (ie. those with an outstanding balance).
  
  
• Employee Details: report now available from the Letters/Diary section that will print the employees diary entries.
  
  
• The 'Import from PayPal' option would not import transactions correctly where the value of the transaction exceeded 999.99 (this is because PayPal put comma's into the numbers, why?). Fixed.
  
  
• Purchase Orders: When using 'Build Up Order From Stock' items could appear on the Purchase Order even though the quantity ordered is zero. Fixed.
  
  
• Customer Account Details (when running in Level 2): the annual sales figures displayed did not get updated on the screen if the customer account record was locked (in use by another user). Fixed.
  
  
• Sales Invoices, when invoicing stock items using VAT/Sales Tax inclusive prices, the price excluding tax was always calculated to 2 decimal places, regardless of the decimal places the 'Each' input field was set to (default is 4). This could cause price inaccuracy, especially where several units were being sold. Fixed.
  
  
• Some users had currency issues when they imported a Chart of Accounts. Fixed.
  
  

v4.082 9th January 2014

• When scanning images into a purchase transaction, if a location other than the default location was used to store the images, the images were not stored. Fixed.
  
  
• If a user edited their own user details, when done they would lose all the print output options. They would come back if the accounts system was exited and restarted. Fixed.
  
  
• When creating a Purchase Order using the 'Build Up Order From Stock' option, items were not being added to the P/O if the re-order quantity was equal to the minimum order quantity on the suppliers record for that item. Fixed.
  
  

v4.081 8th January 2014

• When selecting a new currency in the currency maintenance option, you can now select from a full list of currencies based on ISO 4217.
  
  
• When selecting a new country in the country/region maintenance option, you can now select from a full list of countries based on ISO 3166
  
  
• Balance Sheet report, the default term 'Capital Account' can now be changed.
  
  
• The 'Invoice Rct' and 'Credit Rct' options in supplier details (Level 2 only), now have 'Delete' and 'Edit' buttons.
  
  
• Email: the 'Port' input field has been widened to make it easier to edit the port number.
  
  
• Email: there is now a button (both in main setup and user details) for sending a test email. This makes it faster and easier to test out your email settings.
  
  
• The ability to edit or delete journals that were not created from within the General/Nominal Ledger was removed. This is because changing or deleting journals created by, say, a sales invoice compromised the integrity of the accounts system. Editing or deleting journals would have no bearing on the original customer or supplier transaction, and so would no longer balance. However, this created an issue, in that editing journals to correct for PayPal/credit card fees or rounding issues was a lot quicker (and cleaner) than creating a new posting. So the ability to edit or delete 'foreign' journals is back, but is now user selectable.
  
  
• Supplier invoices, when running in 'Level 2', if viewing an invoice, the department input field allowed the department code to be changed. But the department code can not be updated unless the invoice is being edited (ie. 'Edit' button clicked). Fixed. Department code now grayed out.
  
  
• Supplier invoices, when running in 'Level 2', if the 'Details' tab was selected, and the 'Edit' button then clicked, the Sales Tax/VAT amount field/s would remain grayed out. Fixed.
  
  
• Customer invoices, when running in 'Level 2', if the 'Details' tab was selected, and the 'Edit' button then clicked, the Sales Tax/VAT amount field/s would remain grayed out. Fixed.
  
  
• Employee details, when viewing diary entries marked 'private', the list of users displayed would be wrong, even though only the correct users were allowed access. Fixed
  
  
• When viewing old customer or supplier transactions (except invoices or credit notes), two messages would often pop up regarding the tax date. Fixed.
  
  
• When creating an Early Settlement transaction (with no tax element) for a supplier, a warning message would pop up three times before the Early Settlement form appeared. Fixed.
  
  
• The 'Delete' button on some customer transaction forms did not work. Fixed.
  
  
• The output device list (used when 'printing') set up in user details was being ignored. Fixed.
  
  
• If a user is restricted to accessing cash book only and associated options, they still had access to the 'Financial Summary' in the background. Fixed.
  
  

v4.080 28th December 2013

• When invoicing from stock in 'Level 1: Basic Level Functionality', v4.077 to v4.079 did not update the quantity held in stock, or record the stock movement. Fixed
  
  
• When editing a sales invoice, the software would indicate an item as being out of stock or there was insufficient stock when actually there was sufficient stock available. Fixed.
  
  

v4.079 27th December 2013

• Access to the edit button on customer and supplier transactions, the ability to change customer or supplier account status, can now be set up in the security profile section in user details.
  
  
• Access to cash/bank options of the whole of the General ledger (Nominal Ledger) can also be set up in the security profile section in user details.
  
  
• Sales invoices and other documents: printing used to default to 'Print', but was changed to default to 'View (Text)'. This caused a problem for some users, and so now the default is selectable in 'Defaults and Variables' in the 'Miscellaneous' set up menu.
  
  
• When right clicking on a print button in documents sch as invoices, estimates, etc. if 'View (PDF)' was selected as the output, the document layout selection would not appear. Fixed.
  
  
• When entering General Ledger (Nominal Ledger) journals, using the 'wide' entry form, the 'Description' input fields remained greyed out after the first batch was entered. Fixed.
  
  
• Software was using the email system as set up in 'Defaults and Variables' in the 'Miscellaneous' menu, instead of using the system as given in the user details. Fixed.
  
  
• If 'List Current Users' was selected from the start up screen, the top left hand corner of the list would appear more or less in the middle of the available screen, and so most of the list and it's buttons would be off the screen. Fixed.
  
  
• 'Defaults and Variables' option not available in the Setup->Miscellaneous menu. (This problem only affected v4.078) Fixed.
  
  

v4.077 20th December 2013

• All customer and supplier transactions (except contra's) can now be edited. Including sales invoices.
  
  
• Output to PDF files has now been much improved with the adoption of some new software from Eqeus. This produces PDF documents that are very close to how they would appear when printed. The old PDF system (FoxyPreviewer) is still there, so if you have edited any of your layouts to suite the old PDF output, you can continue to use it. You will need to select in in your Adminsoft Accounts user details, because the system will now default to Eqeus.
  
  
• Business Type codes can now be created. Up to five business types can be associated with each customer. Allowing you to be quite specific if necessary. Of course, if you prefer, they don't have to be used to identify business type, they could be used to classify your customers in some other way.
  
  
• When a customer status is set to 'Concerned' or 'Stopped', you can can now setup what action action you want the software to take when entering a sales invoice. The options are:: no action, warn user, require a password from a supervisor, or prevent invoice from being raised.
  
  
• The list of available output devices, used when 'printing' reports or documents (such as sales invoices, statements, etc.) can now be modified. Devices can be removed if required, and the order in which they appear in the list can be changed.
  
  
• A new output device 'View (PDF)' has been created. This allows output of reports or documents straight into Adobes PDF viewer. Unless FoxyPreviewer is selected as as the PDF file generator (see above), then it goes into FoxyPreviewers own PDF viewer.
  
  
• Stock items have a main description field and an extra description field. They now also have an extra three description fields. When creating a sales invoice or credit note, these extra description fields, if used, will appear in the invoice.
  
  
• In the General Ledger (Nominal Ledger), when selecting an option to enter or edit journals, if the application is 1200 or more pixels wide, a new wider version of the journal entry form will be used. This extra width is used to allow the entry of a line by line description.
  
  
• The form for option 'List Journals' in the General/Nominal Ledger menu can now be dragged wider to show extra information about the transaction.
  
  
• The option to create documents (mainly used for letter writing) will now put the name and address into the document automatically (Word, Writer, and NotePad only). Also, the option can now be called from several other places, including contact details, delivery address details, and factor details.
  
  
• When editing account periods, the software will check the dates are contiguous before re-balancing the period totals. It should detect any gaps or overlapping of period start and end dates.
  
  
• When entering supplier invoices, if the 'Tax Date' was changed, the 'Payment Due' date wasn't calculated properly if the credit terms were so many days or months past end of month. Fixed.
  
  
• The software couldn't find images when images were scanned in or manually located, and then the path to the accounts system was changed. Fixed.
  
  
• Profit & Loss report over multiple account periods, if the YTD figure was zero, due to transactions over the reporting period balancing out, the account would not be shown. Fixed.
  
  
• When creating a Contra from a supplier account to a customer account, the debit and credit postings were the wrong way around! This nasty bug may have crept into the software in early/mid 2013. Fixed.
  
  
• If using the accrual/prepayment option when entering a purchase invoice in a currency other than the ledger currency, the postings would be wrong. Fixed.
  
  
• In the 'Cash/Bank Accounts' option, if user singled left clicked on an account, the 'Single Receipt' and 'Single Payment' option did not automatically bring up the selected account. Fixed.
  
  
• Payroll - United Kingdom only: when submitting an FPS to HMRC, if any employees had a Student Loan deduction, the FPS transmission would fail. Fixed.
  
  

v4.075 16th November 2013

• Chart of Accounts can now be imported, exported, uploaded and download. They can created from the accounts system, and shared with other users by uploading to our web site. The software can also output an XML file containing a Chart of Accounts, which can then be used to load up a Chart of Accounts into other Adminsoft Accounts installations.
  
  
• The loan/mortgage calculator can now output the repayment table to Microsoft Excel or OpenOffice Calc.
  
  
• Email: as well as having the option to choose whether email is sent out from Adminsoft Accounts using Windows CDO or Chilkat, the user can now select Outlook - internal (using Adminsoft Accounts email editor, but Outlook to actually send the email), or Outlook - external, which uses Outlooks email editor). If either of the Outlook options are selected, the SMTP settings used are those as setup in your Outlook. For those of you having difficulty sending email from Adminsoft Accounts, these new options may provide a solution.
  
  
• The stock item find option, often used when creating sale invoices, now displays the quantity in stock. Also, you can drag the form wider (or click an arrow to make it full width) to display further information about the stock item. A single right click on a stock item will list any alternative/equivalent items.
  
  
• The 'Daybook' reports for both customers and suppliers can now list all transactions (as before) or only transactions with an outstanding balance.
  
  
• Sales and purchase invoices: now when the tax date is changed, the delivery date, payment due date and Early Settlement Payment Due date (if relevant) will be automatically updated.
  
  
• If no supplier invoice is going to be received for Purchase Order, in the supplier invoice option, a Purchase Order can now be marked as 'Invoiced' to ensure it doe not appear in the list again.
  
  
• If a Purchase Order is only part received, and is set to 'Received' (ie. the times not received are cancelled), the Purchase Order would continue to appear in the supplier invoice Purchase Orders tab. Fixed.
  
  
• Scanned images, often used for supplier invoices, stock items, and employees. If the images are scanned in directly from Adminsoft Accounts (as opposed to locating existing image files) then they would be stored in the 'docs' folder for that company/organization. If the application is moved or the path changed, the canned images should still be available. However they were not, due to the full path name being saved instead of a relative path name. Fixed.
  
  
• When running on a Mac, backing up data to a ZIP file would cause the software to report the backup failed, as it had 1 file missing. Fixed. (the backup was actually OK, the number of files was misreported)
  
  
• United Kingdom only: when submitting payroll data using RTI, if HMRC's system asked Adminsoft Accounts to wait 0 seconds, it would wait indefinitely. Fixed.
  
  
• On monitors that don't have a lot of height, or if the application was limited to just part of the screen, as various forms were opened, they could start vanishing off the bottom of the screen. Fixed.
  
  
• Inventory/Stock Control: when selecting items required to build up a kit, only whole numbers could be entered for the required quantity. It should allow quantities to two decimal places. Fixed.
  
  
• A default Early Settlement Discount could not be entered into supplier details. Fixed.
  
  

v4.073 25th September 2013

• Stock Item Details now has a 'Print List' button next to most lists.
  
  
• The small graphs showing stock item sales have been improved.
  
  
• When you select 'View (text)' to output a report, the report viewer now has a horizontal scroll bar to make it much easier to see wide reports.
  
  
• Sales Invoices, when the cursor is in one of the 'Stock Code or Description...' input fields, pressing the F4 function key on your keyboard will display the full stock search screen. Once you have located an item, single left click on it and click on the 'OK' button to enter the item into the invoice.
  
  
• Invoice and delivery note layouts: a data item for 'Description' has now been created. This is the short 20 character description or job reference that can be entered when creating any invoice or credit note.
  
  
• When a customer or supplier document such as a ales Invoice/Credit Notre, Proforma, Advice Note, or Estimate is copied, the user now has the option of changing the account code. So effectively copying it to another customer/supplier account.
  
  
• If you sell and purchase from the same business, the customer and supplier accounts can now be linked. This allows the user to easily see an account is linked, and view the details of the other account with one mouse click. It also defaults to the linked account when creating a contra.
  
  
• Purchase Orders: when created from Inventory/Stock Control, they would automatically use the suppliers currency (as set up in the supplier details), but if the order was created from the suppliers details screen it would use the ledger currency. Fixed.
  
  
• Payroll, United Kingdom only, tax code NT was being treated as tax code BR. Fixed.
  
  
• Budget Report: if different types of account were in the same budget group (eg. expense and income) the values would be added together, rather than added/subtracted to arrive at the correct figure. Fixed. (Each budget group must now specify a type, eg. expense, income, etc. though accounts within the group are not limited to that type)
  
  
• If the same account was open by two or more users on a network, or more than one form was accessing the account details in he same application, it was possible to end up locking up the accounts system if a save was attempted (which could be done automatically when skipping from one account to the next). Fixed.
  
  
• Clicking on the 'Help' button in the 'Create Purchase Order' option caused the accounts program to lock up. Fixed.
  
  
• Payroll: United Kingdom only, in the FPS submission, the employee pay-to-date and tax-to-date figures included any figures for previous employment. They should only include figures for current employment. Fixed.
  
  

v4.071 31st August 2013

• Budgets report, can now include each account that makes up the budget group, and can even include the transactions if required.
  
  
• HTML documents (used for emailing invoices, remittance advices, etc.) have had the size for monetary amounts all increased from 999,999,999.99 to 999,999,999,999.99
  
  
• Payroll would sometimes appear in the accounts system, even though it was not enabled in the company/organization details. Fixed.
  
  
• Entering batched Opening Balances in A/c. Payable (Purchase Ledger) nad A/c. Receivable (Sales Ledger), had various problems, with the 'Description' and particularly entering negative balances. Fixed.
  
  
• When a Saved Sales Invoice is turned into a 'live' Sales Invoice, if the user had clicked into any input field containing the stock code and description of a stock item, the stock item quantities and movement would not be updated. Fixed.
  
  
• Sending emails with embedded graphics could often cause and error. Fixed.
  
  

v4.069 12th August 2013

• Setting up account periods, the number of account periods will now default depending on the account period type selected.
  
  
• Nominal/General Ledger: the 'Description' input field can now be left blank if it's not required.
  
  
• Printing from lists now has added output selections: OpenOffice Writer, PDF file, and HTML file.
  
  
• When paying a Remittance Advice, the user can now opt to use a payment allocation date that is different from 'todays' date. This function could be very useful when backdating payments.
  
  
• Adjustments and Write Offs that affect the tax liability will now appear in the tax period end report. However, only the tax balances will appear, as the amounts are adjustments to the balance in an account and do not affect sales. NOTE: this change may cause some old transactions to appear in your next Tax Period End report.
  
  
• Importing PayPal transactions, if a transaction is removed from the list of 'Transactions to be Posted' by mistake, it can now be reinstated.
  
  
• When sending an email via Adminsoft Accounts built in email system, if there is no email address to send to, or the address appears to be invalid, the input field will have a pink background to draw the users attention to the problem.
  
  
• When creating Sales Invoices, Estimates, or similar documents, the system will warn the user if a duplicate line has been entered. Not all users want this behavior, and so this facility can now be turned off in the Accounts Receivable (Sales Ledger) setup (option Defaults & Variables).
  
  
• Invoice and Estimate print layouts: The 'Description Only' field will now print free text descriptions as well as stock item descriptions. If you have a document that uses this data field, you will need to delete the data field and drag and drop the new one into your document.
  
  
• Nominal/General Ledger: 'Post Journals' button remained greyed out unless a valid dept code was entered in each line. It should be possible to leave the department code blank. Fixed.
  
  
• When some old transactions were viewed, if the account period for that transaction was closed, sometimes a message would appear saying the date was invalid. Fixed.
  
  
• Importing PayPal data files, the 'Remove Transaction' button would not always work. Fixed.
  
  
• On installation, the default payroll created was called 'Monthly' but was actually set up as four weekly. Fixed.
  
  
• Batch Payments: when posted in a none ledger currency, they did not post correctly. Fixed.
  
  
• During installation, when setting up a company/organization account periods, if 'No periods' was selected, it created a total of 24 periods, each of one year. It should only create two: one for the current year and one for next year. Fixed.
  
  

v4.068 26th July 2013

• The 'Database - Re-index' option will not run if there are any other forms open, and will notify the user accordingly. If there are other forms open, the re-index would be incomplete.
  
  
• Stock Search: when printing a list of items found, it would miss out the first three items. Fixed.
  
  
• Genera Stock Report would not filter stock items by bin location, sale and purchase discount codes, or sales and purchase analysis codes. Fixed.
  
  
• Batched input of payments for both customer and suppliers would post the amount paid to the account associated with the first payment code in the list of payments codes, instead of the account associated with the actual payment code entered in the transaction. Fixed.
  
  
• When entering Purchase Invoices (level 2 mode only), if you clicked on the 'Post' button, and then clicked on 'New' ready to enter another invoice, the 'Description' input field (in the 'Details' tab) would remain grayed out. Fixed.
  
  
• Employees will not appear on a payroll if they have no letter in their NI Code or the 'Tax Code' input field is left empty. However, when the payroll is used outside of the United Kingdom the NI Code (and often the 'Tax Code') isn't used, and so employees were not appearing in the payroll even tough their details were valid. Fixed.
  
  
• Sales and purchase invoices can be converted into a different documents and/or copied. However, they can not be converted or copied to a different account. But when the option is selected, it would allow users to manually enter an account code, even though the 'Find' button was grayed out. Misleading users into thinking they had posted the transaction to another account. Fixed.
  
  
• Sales invoices and credit notes: if a line has been entered, and the user then clicks back into the 'Description' input field to edit it, the Sales Analysis code, Sales Tax/VAT code, and the price would automatically change back to the default codes once the cursor moved out of that input field. Most of the time this would be fine, but if the user changed any of those input fields when first inputting the line, they may not notice the system has changed them back. Now, once a line has been entered no input fields will revert to default values, the original values will remain, unless manually edited, or the stock item (if invoicing from stock) is changed.
  
  
• The 'Save Emails' setting wasn't being set when a new dataset for a company/organization was created. Fixed.
  
  
• Importing customer or suppliers accounts: if an account in the imported data did not have an account code, then it would be imported with no account code. But without an account code, the user can not access it. Fixed. If there's no account code, a unique number is used, so the user can access the account, and correct the account code.
  
  
• Two new options added to the 'Database - Fix' option, that will scan accounts looking for empty account codes, and replace them with a number. See above.
  
  
• Employee Details: the 'New' button would remain grayed out, unless the Payroll module was enabled. Fixed.
  
  

v4.067 12th June 2013

• Delivery Notes can now have their output directed to view, print, HTML, Excel, Word, etc. in the same way as other documents. (note: when running in 'Level 2', Sales invoices' don't have enough space for the selection of output, so the output is based on whatever is selected for the 'Print Only' button)
  
  
• Document layouts for Accounts Receivable/Sales Ledger can now be copied from document type to another.
  
  
• You now have to click a button to see the legend for the graph in 'Financial Summary' in the background. This is due to a lack of space in the Financial Summary, and some legends being quite extensive (it allows up to 9), and some of the descriptions quite long.
  
  
• In stock item details, a button has been added that can remove all customer special prices for that item in one go.
  
  
• 'Search for a Stock Item' option now has a 'Print List' button.
  
  
• Advice Notes, when compiling Advice Notes into a Sales Invoice, the reference and date of each Advice Note is incorporated into the body of the invoice.
  
  
• In AutoManager anything could be entered into the equipment/vehicle make and model input fields, which due to inconsistencies in spelling made it impossible to produce any kind of sales analysis based on this information. These input fields are now coded, allowing the user to select an existing make & model or enter a new one. There is a new report, 'Equipment/Vehicle Analysis' than provides a summary or detailed breakdown of sales by make/model.
  
  
• Human Resources, in the report section of the menu, selecting the 'Employee Absence/Holidays' option actually started the 'List Email Sent to Employee' option, and selecting the 'List Email Sent to Employee' option did nothing. Fixed.
  
  
• Advice Notes, when multiple Advice Notes for a customer are compiled into one invoice, the sales tax/VAT was not posted correctly. Fixed.
  
  
• Aged Debtors and Aged Creditors reports, when run to show the situation as at a given date (ie. not today's date), while the balances would be correct, they would not always show them in the correct period. This was due to miscalculating the allocation date by one day. Fixed.
  
  
• When entering invoices or credit notes in a currency other than the default currency, for customers or suppliers, it would occasionally introduce a 'penny' error when posting the transaction to the General/Nominal Ledger. Throwing the Trial Balance out of balance. Fixed.
  
  
• The payroll would allow employees to be processed when they did not have a valid NI letter. This would prevent the calculation of any NI due, and would also prevent an FPS submission (UK only). Fixed.
  
  

v4.065 20th May 2013

• A new background has been created. This allows a selection of backgrounds, including the usual 'flowchart menu'. It also includes a new background which provides a financial summary, so you can check the financial health of your business/organization at a glance.
  
  
• When backing up, the last location (and file name if backing up to a ZIP file) is retained in the input fields for next time. So you if tend to backup to the same location, you won't need to use the 'Browse' button each time. Although we always recommend you backup to several locations if possible.
  
  
• The option in setup to check the ledger integrity now has a couple of extra options for checking the General/Nominal Ledger postings created by sales or purchase transactions.
  
  
• Journals created by A/c Receivable (Sales Ledger) or A/c Payable (Purchase Ledger) can no longer be edited or deleted, as it created an imbalance between the ledgers. The only way to change or delete journals that have not been entered manually is to go back to the original transaction.
  
  
• When entering journals in General/Nominal Ledger, if the amount was subject to Sales Tax/VAT, and a Sale Tax/VAT code was entered, the automatically generated line/s for the tax amounts would contain an invalid department code, and would not allow the user to edit it. Preventing the batch from being posted. Fixed.
  
  
• If backing up to a ZIP file, the 'Browse' button always had to be used, otherwise the 'Backup Now' button remained grayed out. Fixed.
  
  

v4.063 2nd May 2013

• The credit limit input field in customer and supplier account details has been widened to accept up to 10 digits.
  
  
• United Kingdom only: payroll: some users reported the FPS RTI submissions would cause the program to freeze after making the submission. Fixed.
  
  

v4.062 23rd April 2013

• Payroll, not calculating correct tax and NI for pay frequencies other than weekly or monthly. Fixed.
  
  
• Payroll, UK only, RTI EPS and NINO submissions kept producing an error message from HMRC. Fixed.
  
  
• When entering Sales or Purchase Invoices that contained an Early Settlement Discount, the discount was not always shown in the invoice totals (in countries where early settlement discount affects the sales tax/VAT calculation). Fixed.
  
  
• When viewing a cash/bank account statement, if a date was selected by clicking on the 'F' button to bring up a calendar, the statement would update as soon as the date selection was made (or canceled), but would not display correctly. Fixed. The display now only updates when the 'Display' button is clicked, as intended.
  
  

v4.061 15th April 2013

• General Ledger (Nominal Ledger): the Enter Journals option now allows a department code to be specified on each individual transaction line.
  
  
• Shop/Cafe Manager: now has a sales analysis report that shows sales totalled by sales analysis code over a given date range.
  
  
• Shop/Cafe Manager: is a VAT registration number has not been entered into company/organization details, a VAT figure will not be printed at the bottom of receipts.
  
  
• Shop/Cafe Manager: regular customers can now be selected during a sale. There is a report available that will list regular customers in sales order over any given period of time. So you can see where your business is coming from.
  
  
• When allocation payment/credit transactions to other customer or supplier transactions, you can now specify a date for the allocation. So allocations can be back dated if required. This is very useful should you need to produce back dated aged debtors or creditors reports.
  
  
• When printing a sales invoice, statement, remittance advice, etc. if you single right click on the print button (instead the usual single left click), you can select a different document layout, just for that one print out.
  
  
• Emails sent from Adminsoft Accounts can now be automatically recorded, So an email history is built up for each account.
  
  
• Cafe/Shop Manager: the sales tab now has a 'wide' mode. Click on the right pointing arrow head and the form jumps to a wider size, showing extra product description. Click it again and it'll return to normal size. Which size you left the form in, it'll display in that size next time.
  
  
• When selling an item in Cafe/Shop Manager, you can now click on a 'Discount' button, which will display the available discounts on that stock item, or allow you to enter a percentage in order to calculate a discount.
  
  
• Both print and HTML layouts for sales invoices, estimates, proforma and delivery notes, now allow the user to select an 'Item Weight' data object, and a 'Total Weight' data object.
  
  
• Payroll, UK only, test RTI submissions worked fine, but it could not make live submissions. Fixed.
  
  
• Customer and supplier labels would output to text OK, but did not print properly. Often only one line of labels would print at the top of each page. Fixed.
  
  
• Till Open Reason Codes setup lists all the reasons for opening a till, but the list didn't show any accounts associated with the open codes, until a code was edited. Fixed.
  
  
• Opening the till and adding or taking money from it, caused incorrect postings during cash up. Fixed.
  
  
• When setting up users email, SSL became enabled whether it was required or not. Fixed.
  
  
• In AutoManager, when booking in a service/repair and entering the tasks to be done. The 'Setup Task Types' button was always greyed out. Preventing any new type of task from being created at that point. Fixed.
  
  
• When using the internal email, with the email system set to use Windows CDO, if the CC input field was used to CC a copy of the email, it used the 'To' address instead of the CC address. Fixed.
  
  

v4.060 29th March 2013

• IMPORTANT: In both customer and supplier accounts, when allocating payments and using the "Automatically Allocate" button, the allocation did not work correctly, and if posted, did not post correctly. Fixed.
  
  
If you've been affected by this error, you'll need to unallocate the problem transactions (select a transaction and click on 'View Allocation', and then 'Unallocate All Above Transactions') and then re-allocate the transactions.


• When a new payroll was created, the first pay period could not be created. Fixed.
  
  
• The payroll pay period was not appearing correctly in the list of payrolls. Fixed.
  
  

v4.059 27th March 2013

• United Kingdom only: RTI can now accept government gateway user ID and password, and so can be run in live mode (ie. not just test mode as previously).
  
  
• Once a day (on days the software is started up) the software will automatically check to see if there is a later version available. If there is, the user is given the option to download it. The feature can be turned off if the user wishes.
  
  
• For those users with less than perfect eye sight, there is an option to change the size of the text, input fields, and everything else in the program. Click on 'Help' on the top menu bar, and select 'Change Form and Font Sizes'. This option has been there for some time, but has never really worked too well. It's now been improved. It isn't perfect, but most things resize better, and the setting remains for your next session. So you don't have to select this option every time you start up the program.
  
  
• The email editor has been given a make over, with better looking buttons.
  
  
• If you have tried to use the built in email system without success, it might be because your SMTP email host requires SSL. Google and Sky, I believe require SSL. This was previously not available in Adminsoft Accounts. However, it has now been added, so in email settings you can enable SSL. If you have previously been unable to use the built in email, it's worth trying again.
  
  
• Batch input for customer and supplier transactions has a delete button, but this rarely worked. Fixed. Note, if transactions have been posted, they are NOT deleted, only the batch itself is deleted.
  
  
• If a stock item appears on more than one current Purchase Order, only the quantity in the last Purchase Order shows in the stock item details as being on order. Fixed.
  
  
• If stock items were put into stock using the 'Stock Received' or 'Adjustment' option (ie. they didn't come in from a Purchase Order), if there were any on order, the on order figure would be reduced. Fixed.
  
  
• The Aged Debtors and Creditors reports, when producing figures based on a previous date, did not always produce the correct figures, or show the correct transactions (if selected). Fixed.
  
  
• The 'Compact' version of the Aged Debtors report printed all balances reduced by a factor of 100. Fixed.
  
  
• When one transaction was allocated to one or more other transactions, the allocation amounts were not always recorded properly. Fixed, and all allocations made prior to updating the software will be automatically corrected.
  
  
• When creating a Sales Invoice, if a new delivery address was selected, and the 'Customer Account' button was clicked to select a delivery address from an existing customer, the new delivery address would not appear in the sales invoice. Fixed.
  
  
• Customer and suppliers labels could not be printed from the option in the 'Report' sections of their respective menus. Fixed.
  
  
• When exporting document layouts (to file, the upload to web worked fine) Sales Advice Notes would get exported as Proforma Invoices and vice versa. Fixed.
  
  

v4.058 2nd March 2013

• Document Layouts can now be uploaded to Adminsoft's web site directly from Adminsoft Accounts, and then downloaded by other users. To upload a document layout, click on 'Setup' on the top menu bar, go down to 'System', and select 'Upload Document Layouts to Web Site'.
  
  
• Profit & Loss (Income Statement) report: when multiple periods are selected, there is now an option to show summary of all account periods in one column, or show one column per account period.
  
  
• A default Sales Tax/VAT code can now be added to supplier accounts. If present, this code will be used when entering invoices/credit notes and creating purchase orders.
  
  
• Customer and Supplier Account Details: the lists of current and historic transactions now have a print button to make it quick and simple to print the lists as shown. This is only available when the accounts system is running in level 2.
  
  
• Aged Creditors and Debtors lists and reports: when options are selected for excluding accounts in credit, or showing pence, these options are now remembered for next time. Also, the printed reports previously did not have these options at all.
  
  
• Aged Debtors report now has an extra option for producing a compact version of the report that arranges the customer information in two columns. This halves the length of the report, though does not give an aged breakdown due to space limitations.
  
  
• A new 'Fix' procedure added to the 'Database - Fix' option, to correct the costs associated with sales invoices and credit notes.
  
  
• General Stock Report now has an option to print full stock item details, and allows the user to select a range of various lists, such as stock movements, sales, associated items, etc.
  
  
• Stock Item Details report when printing various lists of stock movements, sales, etc. if output to a spreadsheet, the information in each column in the lists did not appear in separate cells. Fixed.
  
  
• When running in 'Level 1' and creating a sales invoice from stock, the total cost figure was not being stored in the invoice/credit note record. Fixed.
  
  
• Running an Aged Debtors or Creditors report for a previous date, did not always produce the correct figures due to an issue with the allocation of transactions. Fixed.
  
  
• Early Settlement Discount, when displaying an existing transaction did not display all the figures, and displayed a wrong letter in front of the transaction reference. Fixed.
  
  
• The 'Help List' (click on 'Help' on the top menu bar, then select 'Help') would not bring up any details on the selected help topic. Fixed.
  
  
• Payroll: Would display a warning message saying the employees NI letter was 'invalid for a male' regardless of the gender of the employee, or whether the NI letter was actually valid or not. Fixed.
  
  
• Stock Item Details Report would not print special prices to customers. Fixed.
  
  
• Two options to send information about any software errors directly to Adminsoft stopped working! Fixed.
  
  

v4.057 4th February 2013

• The Sales Tax/VAT table printed on invoices/credit notes and estimates can now have the column headings changed (Setup->System->Setup Country/Region Data). Very useful if you do not live in an English speaking country and want your documents to appear in your native language.
  
  
• For the United Kingdom only: The payroll now supports Real Time Information reporting to HMRC. This is only a small entry in this list, but it was a major project!
  
  
• In customer and supplier accounts, if the account status input field was blank, the 'Save' button would be grayed out, which is correct. However entering a value should then enable the 'Save' button, but this wasn't happening. Fixed.
  
  
• The two options (in the application background) for entering money received or paid out, used the same list of accounts in the drop down list. Fixed.
  
  
• Sales Invoices: single right clicking on a cost item should bring up the stock details form, but didn't. Fixed.
  
  
• Sales Invoices: when copying an invoice that contained stock items, in the costs section ,it would multiply the cost each stock item by the quantity and use that as the new cost each. Fixed.
  
  
• Company/Organization Details: the 'Copy From' button did not work. It created the directory structure (if it was a new company/organization), but did not actually copy the data. Fixed.
  
  

v4.055 23rd January 2013

• Shop/Cafe Manager: the kitchen printout can now be setup to use a different printer to the receipt printer if required.
  
  
• Receipt Printing: as well as specifying a physical printer port (COM1, LPT1, etc.) users can now specify a particular printer instead. If they do this, output will go through the Windows printer driver instead of directly out the port. Modern receipt printers connect via USB, and expect to be used via the Windows printer driver. So this method is becoming the norm.
  
  
• Payroll: The 'Pay All Employees' button remained grayed out, preventing the payroll from receiving input for the next pay period. Fixed.
  
  

v4.052 8th January 2013

• Some extra input fields have been added into the employee details form, in anticipation of RTI that will be introduced in the United Kingdom in April. (A fully RTI compliant version of the software will be available later this month)
  
  
• Direct link put into the 'Help' menu that goes to the telephone & on-site support web pages.
  
  
• When running in 'Level 1: Basic Level Functionality'. It would not allow new customer accounts to be created! Fixed.
  
  
• Customer Statements: The text 'Credit Limit' started showing as 'Free text' instead. Fixed.
  
  
• Payroll: when accessing 'Pay Input' from the 'History' option it would not reprint or preview payslips from pay runs already processed. Fixed.
  
  
• One user running Windows XP reported that after upgrading to v4.050 (which supports PDF file output) his invoices, estimates, and statements would only print once. To print another document he had to completely exit the accounts system, and restart it. This turned out to be due to the print routines no longer automatically closing files. So rather then relying on Windows/FoxPro, the files are now specifically closed. However, no other user has reported this issue.

v4.050 22nd December 2012

• Reports and documents (such as sales invoices, statements, etc) can now be directly output as a PDF file, or as a PDF attachment to an email. PDF's use the same layout's as printed documents, though you can specify different default layouts for them.
  
  
• The 'Money Received' and 'Sundry Payment' options now have an additional option for entering payment transactions that require multiple postings. ie. are for more than one item. Also, adding a reason for payment (an account) has now been made easier.
  
  
• When entering a new delivery address during sales invoice creation, an existing address from a customer account, customer delivery address, or a supplier account address can be selected if required.
  
  
• When entering transactions, the autocomplete facility (if used, it is optional) now lists suggested input based on the customer or supplier account selected.
  
  
• The included HTML layout for Purchase Orders now includes a 'deliver to' name and address.
  
  
• There is now a report available to print unreconciled cash/bank transactions.
  
  
• When a customer or supplier transaction reaches a zero outstanding balance, it is automatically moved from 'current' to 'history'. If this doesn't happen for any reason, or you have managed to create a transaction with a zero balance, there is now an option in setup -> system - > database - fixing that will move all transactions with a zero balance outstanding to 'history'.
  
  
• Printed Documents layout: When the data field 'Currency' is dropped onto a layout, it will usually only get printed if the document is not in the ledger currency. There is now an option in 'Setup' -> 'System' -> 'Setup Country/Region Data' that allows you to specify that the currency should always be printed.
  
  
• Both the installation/update program and the accounts system itself now recognize Windows 8.
  
  
• When General Ledger (Nominal Ledger) transactions are deleted, if they are associated with some other transactions in another part of the accounts system, perhaps customer or supplier transactions, the user will be warned of possible ramifications, and advised to delete the original transaction instead. Although the user will not be prevented from deleting if they wish to continue.
  
  
• Printed Documents layout: When creating/editing a line, the line style selected was not always the line style that got printed. Fixed.
  
  
• When updating existing software, some times edited document layouts would get overwritten. Fixed.
  
  
• When viewing the pay history in employee details, the print button was always greyed out. Fixed.
  
  

v4.047 29th October 2012

• Raising a credit note for a stock item for a customer that has a 'markup on cost' discount band would not generate a proper price for the item. Fixed.
  
  

v4.046 27th October 2012

• The PayPal import option now allows you to specify which transaction types you wish to import.
  
  
• When creating an invoice, credit note, estimate, advice note, or proforma invoice, when the cursor is in the 'Stock Code or Description' input field, pressing F5 on your keyboard or Ctrl-R will replicate the existing line.
  
  
• When editing the format (ie. headings) for Profit & Loss, Balance Sheet, and Cash Flow reports, you can now change the order in which they appear by using 'Up' and 'Down' buttons to move individual headings up or down the list.
  
  
• The backup option has a facility to backup to a ZIP file, it also creates a ZIP if backing up via email or FTP. When a ZIP is created, it now checks it to ensure it contains the correct number of files.
  
  
• Many forms can now be dragged smaller in one dimension, or sometimes both. This causes scroll bars to appear in the form.
  
  
• On documents such as sales invoices, purchase invoices, credit notes, estimates, etc. the input fields 'Each' and the calculated field 'Amount' have been widened to accommodate the maximum value the software can handle. This is 999,999,999.99 although the 'Each' field defaults to 9,999,999.9999 this can be changed in setup.
  
  
• Sales invoices, credit notes, estimates, etc. The 'Copy' and 'Convert' buttons are now available even when the transaction/document is still at the work in progress stage, ie. exists only as a 'saved' transaction/document.
  
  
• The sales tax/VAT registration number is now printed out on receipts in Cafe/Shop Manager.
  
  
• Estimates that were created, and then saved to work on later, when recalled they showed as an 'Invoice'. The software would then not allow the estimate to be completed. Fixed.
  
  
• Early Settlement Discount when entered in Accounts Payable (Purchase Ledger), posted the debit and credit the wrong way around. Fixed.
  
  
• The 'Money Received' and 'Sundry Payment' options would allow postings into account periods that were closed. Fixed.
  
  
• Only one Estimate Layout (print) would appear in the list used to select the default layout. Fixed.
  
  
• Printed document layouts, if a line was changed from being a solid line to anything else, the changed line property was not saved. Fixed.
  
  

v4.045 2nd October 2012

• PayPal sales transactions can now be imported directly into the General/Nominal Ledger.
  
  
• Sales Invoices (when running the accounts system in 'Level 2'), maximum number of invoice lines has now increased from 100 to 999.
  
  
• Sales Invoices, it is now possible to change the delivery address (and re-print the delivery note if required) after the invoice has been posted.
  
  
• When creating Purchase Orders, when the cursor is in the stock code or stock description input fields the F8 key or Ctrl-F can be pressed to search for a stock item.
  
  
• When entering a new 'Equity' account, it could only be saved by clicking on the 'OK' button and coming out of the account details screen. Fixed. You can now click on ;Save'.
  
  
• When using a 'Find' list to look for customers or suppliers, as well as selecting by a single left mouse click, you can now also press the Enter key on your keyboard.
  
  
• It was possible to change the ledgers default currency after a company/organization had been setup. But this would cause big problems with any existing transactions and accounts, as they would all be in the original currency. So it's no longer possible to change the ledgers base currency.
  
  
• Human Resources / Payroll: It is no longer possible to delete an employee if they earned any salary.
  
  
• When a journal is edited, it no longer uses up a posting reference code. So the posting sequence is now maintained.
  
  
• Stock Items Details, Stock Report, if 'Purchase Orders' were selected, they didn't get printed. Fixed.
  
  
• Customer and Supplier lists missed off the credit limit and outstanding amounts when output to a printer or some other software or file. Fixed.
  
  
• The Sales Tax Analysis and Purchase Tax Analysis reports would sometimes show an * instead of the tax code, where a two digit tax code was being used. They would also sometimes miss out transactions. Fixed.
  
  
• When restoring data. If the data is not stored in the default location (ie. a different location has been specified in the the company/organization details), it does not restore to that location, but tries to restore it to the default location. Fixed.
  
  
• When a sales invoice was copied, or some other document converted, the 'sort stock' and 'sort description' buttons were greyed out. Fixed.
  
  
• When a transaction was deleted that was not in the ledgers base currency, the currency value would not be deducted from the account period totals. The ledger base currency totals would be correct, so this only affected cash/bank statements for foreign currency accounts. Fixed.
  
  
• The option to fix out of balance postings in the General/Nominal Ledger did not function correctly if the postings were not in the ledger base currency. Fixed.
  
  

v4.043 22nd August 2012

• It is now possible to set the next estimate (quote) number.
  
  
• Cafe/Shop Manager can now be used with a bar code scanner.
  
  
• Purchase Orders can now be previewed during creation, without actually saving/processing the order.
  
  
• Stock item details can now be located by the bar code (either typed in or scanned in).
  
  
• An existing Purchase Order can now be copied. Could save time creating a new Purchase Order.
  
  
• When a special price is given to a customer when creating a sales invoice, it is now possible to record that special price so it is automatically used next time the same item is invoiced. To do this, single right click in the 'Price Each' input field.
  
  
• Currencies: changes in exchange rate can now be easily viewed for each currency. It also shows a small graph showing the changes over the last twelve months.
  
  
• Customer and supplier account details can now display balances and transactions in their original currency. ie. not just the ledger currency.
  
  
• Customer statements will now print out in the currency of the customer, and not the ledger currency.
  
  
• Sales Invoices (when system running in Level 2) can now have the invoice lines sorted into description order, as well as stock code order.
  
  
• The 'Invoice Rct' and 'Credit Rct' options in supplier details, now allow the calculated amount of VAT/Sales Tax to be edited.
  
  
• Account search options for customers and suppliers can now also search the diary, any transaction dispute records, and the transactions themselves. The forms can be resized to show the results in more detail, and the results can be printed. The search can be paused and/or canceled.
  
  
• Factors were limited to bank account numbers and sort codes/routing codes of 12 characters each. They are now 20 and 40 characters respectively.
  
  
• The shortcut keys introduced in v4.041 conflicted with using Ctrl-C or Ctrl-V to copy and paste content into or out of input fields, and the backspace key. Fixed. The shortcut keys now require Alt key to be depressed before they will activate, instead of the Ctrl key.
  
  
• An error in the calculations for the Trial Balance report for a specific period sometimes produced a wrong opening/closing balance. This applies to both the 'List' option and the printed report. Fixed.
  
  
• The option to fix Nominal/General Ledger balances in the database fixing option did not properly fix balances on foreign currency accounts. Fixed.
  
  
• Bank/cash statements for accounts in a foreign currency: when switching between the account currency and the ledger currency, or vice versa, the opening balance did not update. And so all subsequent balances would be wrong. Fixed.
  
  
• When backing up using FTP, it would leave a message "Creating ZIP file..." on the screen. Fixed.
  
  
• The Sales tax/VAT registration number in customer details was not being saved. Fixed.
  
  

v4.041 27th July 2012

• Bank/cash accounts are now supported in other currencies. Balances are maintained both in the ledgers base currency and the account currency. There is an option to revaluate when necessary.
  
  
• When entering sales invoices, credit notes, proformas, or advice notes, you can now press the F8 function key on your keyboard, or Ctrl-F, to activate the stock find option (this is the same as clicking on the 'F' button). When in the stock find option, pressing the Enter key on your keyboard selects the highlighted stock item. This allows you to enter information without using a mouse until the very end. Can make the operation much quicker.
  
  
• Most of the more frequently used options now allow short cuts. In other words, various options can be selected from the keyboard rather than having to click on a button. The OK button for example, could be selected by pressing Ctrl-O (pressing the letter 'O' on your keyboard while holding down the button marked 'Ctrl').
  
  
• Payments from customers: a payment receipt can now be printed. Although the print format is fixed, the HTML version can be edited.
  
  
• The Trial Balance lists can now show the customer and supplier account details when listing transactions for a particular General/Nominal Ledger account entry. Because of lack of space in the list, the details are off to the right hand side, not normally visible. So you need to drag the form wider, or click on a small green arrow that points to the right.
  
  
• A payroll can now be deleted even if it has been run, and there are pay periods for it. This will remove all references to the payroll, including the pay slips of any employees that were paid via that payroll.
  
  
• When the software is processing a transaction/s, if it came across a record that it needed to update, but the record was locked by another form, or another user (if on a network), the program would stop until the record was released. The problem is, if it was locked by another form, it wasn't possible to get to the form to close it and release the record, because the application was effectively frozen. This no longer happens. If a record a locked, a message appears, but the program does not freeze, allowing the user to close the offending form and release the record.
  
  
• The font size (and by necessity the sizes of the forms, input fields, etc) can now be changed. The options are to make them 10%, 25%, 35% or 60% bigger.
  
  
• Asset Register. It is now possible to delete assets. Though if any General/Nominal Ledger postings are required, they have to be made manually.
  
  
• Stock Item Details: When a Sales Discount code is entered, the automatically calculated discounted prices now appear in stock details. Making it easier for the user to see the effect of discounting.
  
  
• Some of reports that are likely to be long can now be paused, or canceled at any time. If paused, you will be able to use the accounts system to do nearly anything (except produce another report), and then come back to the report and allow it to continue, or cancel it.
  
  
• When printing a Trial Balance for specific account periods, the description of each account is limited to only 11 characters, because of hte number of columns of figures also being printed. There is now an option to print a wide version of the report, which will print the accounts descriptions in full.
  
  
• Payroll: When an individual employee is paid (ie. using the 'Pay Single Employee' option), what ever payment method is used will be printed on the employees payslip (previous it always printed the default payment method for that particular payroll).
  
  
• When user details are setup to go straight into a particular company/organization after logging in, in v4.040 it failed to do this. Fixed.
  
  
• When an invoice (or estimate, or proforma) was copied or converted, the tax calculator button remained disabled. Fixed.
  
  

v4.040 1st July 2012

• Delivery addresses can now be added to a sales invoice layout.
  
  
• Delivery notes (printed from a sales invoice) can now print the delivery address (instead of just the customers invoice address).
  
  
• In Cafe/Shop Manager, the 'tab' is now printed on the receipt when a bill is printed. This being an optional temporary bill, prior to the customer settling their account.
  
  
• In CafeManager: a 'kitchen order' can now be printed out on the receipt printer. Also, kitchen notes can be added to the customers order that do not appear on the final receipt, but do get printed on the kitchen order.
  
  
• In Cafe/Shop Manager, if no default bank account has been set up for the till, the system will use the bank account set up on the payment code. If it uses the bank account on the payment code, it will also make any payment commission or fee postings as necessary.
  
  
• The cash up procedure (used in AutoManager, and Cafe/Shop Manager) can now be done at any time, and as many times as required. So cashing up past midnight, or at any time of day, is no longer a problem.
  
  
• When cashing up in Cafe/Shop Manager, postings can now made for COGS. This feature is enabled in the general Shop/Cafe Manager setup.
  
  
• Can now enter an opening balance directly into the till (ie. the 'float').
  
  
• When a form is resized, it now keeps that size. Even when the application is closed down and then started up again. The size can still be changed at any time, of course. This ability to remember the form size is optional (default is 'off'), and selectable in user details.
  
  
• If an invoice has been created from a job in the AutoManager option, the job number is now displayed at the top of the invoice. A single left click on this will bring up the job details.
  
  
• HTML footers (some times called 'signatures') can now be entered. and automatically added to each email.
  
  
• When using a receipt printer in AutoManager or Cafe/Shop Manager, the command codes to open a till are now user definable. The default is 27,7,10,10,7 Users can now also specify control codes for activating a cutter. The default is 27,109
  
  
• Backing up 'Common Data' files, no longer creates separate folders or ZIP files for 'System' and 'Layout'. Only one folder or ZIP file is now created.
  
  
• Backups can now be done via FTP.
  
  
• There is now an option for 'Quick Backups'. This will backup your company/organization data by just clicking on one button. However, it's not the safest way of backing up, as it backs up the data to another folder on your hard drive (it creates a new folder each time, so you can have multiple backups). But if you're in a hurry, it's better than not backing up at all.
  
  
• Setting up a new company/organization, if an alternative data location is selected, if no data already exists in that location it will now be created. Also, data can now be copied from other company/organization's that may be using alternative date locations.
  
  
• Company/organization's that use alternative data locations can now be deleted. Note: this only deletes the company/organization record, and not the data.
  
  
• When editing document print layouts (invoices, statements, etc), images and logo's can no longer have a height or width of less than 16 pixels. There have been issues where users have placed an image or logo on to a document, and reduced the size to the point where they could not see it. Which can cause problems, as it can no longer be seen to be modified or deleted. This can no longer happen.
  
  
• The VAT/Sales Tax Summary now shows the tax period end date, company/organization, and the date and time the summary was produced.
  
  
• The 'Price List' report in Stock Control/Inventory can now print a VAT/Sales Tax inclusive price next to the exclusive price. Note: this only applies if your stock prices are exclusive of VAT/Sales Tax.
  
  
• The Sundry Payment and Money Received options: in the account selection input fields, as well as selecting the account from a list as before, you can just enter the account code, and the account will be located. This can make input a little quicker, if you know what the account code is.
  
  
• When entering an invoice for sales or purchases with the accounts system running in level 2, if you deleted a line, the change wasn't always reflected in the VAT/sales tax analysis in the 'Details' page (although the tax was calculated correctly). Fixed.
  
  
• The internal email system is supposed to accept multiple email addresses into the 'To', 'CC', and 'BCC' input fields. But if more than one address was entered, the email address validation would flag it as being invalid, and would not allow the email to be sent. Fixed.
  
  
• When sending reports out to OpenOffice Calc, sometimes the date would display ERR! Yet some dates would be OK. This is because some dates are sent out as character fields, and some as actual date fields. It is the actual date fields that were failing because they were not in the correct format for OpenOffice. Fixed.
  
  
• In the AutoManager option, when viewing a job that had been invoiced, the 'Invoice' button was grayed out. It should be enabled, to allow users to view the invoice. Fixed.
  
  
• When using Shop/Cafe Manager, if a user logged out of Sales Counter, and a different user logged back in, many of the details particular to that new user (email settings, access settings, etc.) were not picked up. Fixed.
  
  
• When the accounts software is first installed, when exiting it displays a user feedback form. If this form is completed by the user, the users default browser appears but displays two web pages instead of one. A page thanking them for their feedback, and the usual application exit page. Fixed. It now just displays the 'thank you' page.
  
  
• Backing up data for a company/organization where the data is not held in the default location would fail. ie. If a path has been specified in the 'Alternative location for data' field in company/organization details. Fixed.
  
  
• Sales Tax/VAT table. When setting up a tax table, the user can enter notes for each tax rate. However, if those notes were longer than around 150 characters or so, when the tax table is displayed after clicking a find ('F') button, it would appear empty. As if no tax rates had been set up. Fixed.
  
  
• When converting or copying sale invoices, estimates, or proforma's, all costs were treated as stock items. This would cause the prices of none stock items to be zeroised, and a message to appear saying the cost item was not found. Fixed.
  
  
• When updating the software. If the user elected not to run the software immediately after the update, if certain files require a structure change, the software may not run correctly later on. If the software was started up by the installation program, it knew it had to check and update some file structures if necessary, but if run later it would not do this. Fixed.
  
  
• When entering a new employee into Human Resources, it was possible to create an employee with no employee reference. Fixed.
  
  

v4.036 12th May 2012

• When creating sales invoice from stock, if any of the stock items have a weight, the weight of all items invoiced will be added up and displayed on the invoice form.
  
  
• When entering items into a sales invoice, if the user enters an item that has already been input into that same document, a warning is displayed. But it does not stop the same item from being entered twice (or more) if the user wishes.
  
  
• When creating a sales invoice, there is now a small button near the top labeled 'Sort Stock/Desc' which will sort the invoice lines into Stock Code/Description order. This button is only available when running the accounts system in level 2.
  
  
• As regular backups are so important, the date a company/organization last had it's data backed up is now displayed in the accounts system start up screen.
  
  
• When installing the accounts system and entering the account year details, it was possible to inadvertently enter the wrong account year for a given account year start date. The software now checks this, and corrects the account year if necessary. It will warn the user it has corrected the account year.
  
  
• Posting journals in the General/Nominal Ledger, there is an option to print the batch. But of course this will not print the posting number as it hasn't been allocated at that time. Now, just after the batch has been posted, the system asks the user if they want to print the batch. This print out will contain the batch posting number.
  
  
• When using the Chilkat internal email system, it needs to check the chilkat2.dll file is registered in Windows. If it's not, it would attempt to do this automatically. But if it failed,it did not notify the user. Now it notifies the user and provides instructions on what to do next. (Usually if it failed, it's because the command to register the file needed to be run as administrator)
  
  
• The operation of the 'Save' button in the email edit form has been improved. It now always asks for a location and file name before saving. If an existing file is being edited, it will use that as the default location and name. It makes the save button much easier to use.
  
  
• When installing Adminsoft Accounts, the email system used now defaults to internal email using Windows CDO.
  
  
• When creating an email using the internal email system (either Windows CDO or Chilkat), the editor would always use double spacing. Fixed.
  
  
• The Trading Report would crash the application if there were more than about 20 accounting periods in the financial year, and output was to 'view' or to 'Excel'. Fixed.
  
  
• If the accounts system is left running overnight, the following day it uses the previous days date as default when entering transactions. Fixed.
  
  
• When using the AutoManager module, if the user clicks "INVOICE CUSTOMER", then "FIND" then "CREATE NEW CUSTOMER" After the creation of the new customer, go directly to "VEHICLES/EQUIPMENT" tap and click "NEW" vehicle it displays an error message and does not allow the user to enter any data. Fixed.
  
  
• VAT/Sales Tax Period End Report: The 'Total Tax....' figure could be incorrect where taxable transactions are entered through the General/Nominal Ledger. It added the debt and credit tax figures, instead of subtracting the debit figure from the credit. Fixed. (This issue only applies to countries where there is only one sales tax, but does not apply to the United Kingdom.)
  
  

v4.035 19th April 2012

• Customers, suppliers, and employee details, could not create new diary entries. Fixed.
  
  
• eMail: when dropping an image into an email off the local hard disk drive, if the image was then re-sized, it did not get embedded in the email. Fixed.
  
  
• Sales Invoices: if an invoice was copied and one of the cost items was no longer a valid stock item, it would display a negative cost amount. Fixed.
  
  
• When adding new customers or suppliers (when operating the accounts system in level 2), not all input fields set up as mandatory input fields would appear with a colored background to indicate they were mandatory. Fixed.
  
  

v4.034 9th April 2012

• A new function has been added to customer details, supplier details, and contacts. This is the Additional Contact Information. It allows extra telephone, fax, and email addresses to be entered, but it also allows details of FaceBook, Twitter, eBay etc. to be entered, and can directly go to these accounts.
  
  
• The customer/supplier diary details can now display HTML, which is the standard used by emails.
  
  
• If a diary entry is locked by another user or form, the details are still displayed, but can not be edited.
  
  
• Payroll: United Kingdom only, tax and NI figures for tax year end April 2013 now used when any new company/organization created.
  
  
• The 'Default' sales tax/VAT code used for new customer account is checked to make sure it doesn't contain a 'Y' or a 'N' which are the old values for this data field. It should be empty or contain a sales tax/VAT code. The data field is corrected if necessary.
  
  
• Balance Sheet report can now be produced to cover a range of account periods.
  
  
• eMail Shots, a list of email addresses had to be compiled, even if you only wanted to send a test email. This is has now been changed, so a test can be sent without any address list.
  
  
• The diary would not skip past (using the 'Prev' or 'Next' buttons) any diary entries that were marked as private. Fixed.
  
  
• eMail Shots: if user selected to record the email in the customers/suppliers diary, it did not make a diary entry. Fixed.
  
  
• When transactions were imported, although the General/Nominal Ledger postings were being made, and when viewing postings the original sales or purchase transaction could be viewed, the postings could not be viewed from the original transaction. Fixed. (this fix will work retrospectively, if you could not view postings, you should be able to after this update)
  
  
• Balance Sheet Report: The 'Capital Account' would occasionally be incorrect. Fixed.
  
  

v4.033 21st March 2012

• General/Nominal Ledger journal entry, while the debits and credits do not balance, the totals for each column are shown in red. Beneath these it now displays a figure representing the difference between the two columns, to make it easier to find the reason for an imbalance.
  
  
• Sales Invoicing, the Sales Analysis and Sales Tax/VAT input fields can be right clicked to display a list of codes. Useful if there is a code already entered, but you're not sure if it's the right one.
  
  
• Sales Invoicing, when the cursor is in the 'Description or Stock Code...' input field, pressing the F9 function key on your keyboard will display a list of previously entered invoice lines for that customer. Allowing you to select one if you wish, which will then be automatically entered into the invoice. Right clicking will produce a menu, allowing the user to view/edit stock item details (if a stock item has been entered), list previously entered invoice details, or list pre-entered general invoice text.
  
  
• Adminsoft Accounts requires access to code page 1252. In most western countries this is not an issue, but in countries that do not use the Latin alphabet they often do not have this code page available by default. Windows needs to be setup to handle none-Unicode English applications. If this was not done, the software would produce all kind of error messages, none of which actually pointed to the problem. Now the software checks on start up that code page 1252 is available, and if it is not, the application stops, displaying a message telling the user why and what they need to do.
  
  
• Database Import Customers and Suppliers option, the import file names used get left in the system, so when option is selected again, messages pop up for any of the import files that no longer exist. The messages have been stopped,but the files are still checked to see if they exist, and buttons are enabled or disabled as necessary.
  
  
• In the 'Database - Fixing' option (in Setup -> System) some help is now available for each option. Also, two new options have been added: one to correct sales tax on customer transactions, and the the other is to correct sales tax on purchase transactions.
  
  
• Software bug report: now provides the software version and includes the file name of any user files. I admit this is of far more interest to Adminsoft than you guys!
  
  
• Special Prices set up for customers were not being used when creating a sales invoice. Fixed.
  
  
• eMail Shots, the 'Send Test Email' button always used the Chilkat email system and the standard SMTP settings, regardless of settings. Fixed.
  
  
• eMail Shots, when the email system was set to Windows CDO, the emails going out did not include any 'From' name, only the 'from' email address. Fixed.
  
  
• Nominal/General Ledger, some of the reports require an account period to be typed in or selected. If the default account period needed changing was in double digits, it was sometimes awkward to change it. Fixed.
  
  
• Sales Invoicing, when the user clicks into the 'Customer Account' input field, and then clicks one of the 'F' buttons to locate a stock item, the find stock item form would appear behind the invoice form. Effectively locking the system up. Fixed.
  
  
• Sales Invoicing, if the cursor was positioned in the Sales Analysis code or Salea Tax/VAT input fields, and they were blank, and the user then clicks on 'Cancel'. The form will not cancel until a valid Sales Analysis or Tax code was entered. Fixed.
  
  
• The default VAT/Sales Tax code was NOT being used when a stock item is selected in an invoice. Fixed.
  
  

v4.032 1st March 2012

• If the accounts system is operating with remote data, if the remote data is no longer available or has moved,the software would not start up. Now it displays the screen to allow the user to select a different location for the data.
  
  
• When a new set of ledgers is created, opening balances for cash/bank accounts are now posted to a new account 9970 'Other Opening Balances'.
  
  
• CafeManager, the name of the table and the code of the person serving at the till is now printed on the receipt. The table name is also recorded in the receipt data and is displayed when viewing receipt details.
  
  
• Bar graphs for both customers and suppliers, each bar displayed is clickable and lists the transactions that went into making up that graph data. These lists now have a 'Print List' button.
  
  
• Stock Item Details, any special prices to customers will now appear in the list in customer account code order.
  
  
• Purchase Invoices, when the 'Images' option is selected to scan purchase invoices, existing images can now be selected by clicking the 'Locate File' button.
  
  
• A 'Total tax on sales less tax on purchases' figure has been put into the sales tax period end report and summary (does not apply to United Kingdom). In many countries, this figure may be the tax due for payment, but not all. Due to the way sales tax/VAT is operated in different countries, and the various schemes available, the accounts system only reports tax charged to customers and tax paid to suppliers, it does not provide a tax due for payment figure.
  
  
• The Backup and Restore options can now backup and restore any document images.
  
  
• Balance Sheet now shows 'Retained Profit' in the 'Equity' section. This is fictitious account in that postings can not be made to it. It exists in order to balance the Balance Sheet, and automatically show the retained earnings figure.
  
  
• Email previously could be setup to use Outlook (not for email shots though), or Adminsoft Accounts internal email (provided by 3rd party software Chilkat). There is now a third option using Windows own built in email software (CDO.Message). This has the advantage over Chilkat in that there are no files that require registering. Making Adminsoft Accounts even more portable. But it has the disadvantage in that it will not work in Windows versions older than Windows 2000. I suspect this will not be an issue. If you have been experiencing problems with Chilkat (usually authentication related), you may want to try switching to CDO.
  
  
• Record locking had a default time out of 12 hours. Any record locked longer than this automatically has the lock cleared. This default can now be changed by the user in setup. Minimum is 1 hour.
  
  
• When in company/organization details, if an alternative location is selected for the data, the 'Delete' and 'Copy From' buttons now remain enabled.
  
  
• When in company/organization details, if he user clicked into the alternative location input field, but left it blank, a backslash would appear which could not be removed. This prevented the system from finding the data. Fixed.
  
  
• In Setup, Customer Defaults, selecting a sales tax/VAT code by clicking the find button did not work. Although a code could be selected, it did not get automatically pasted into the input field. Fixed.
  
  
• Asset Register, the option to automatically depreciate assets and make the necessary postings into the ledger, only made the first posting then stopped. Also, it did not clear the 'depreciation year to date' field ready for the next financial year. Fixed.
  
  
• The 'Apply Regular Postings' option in Nominal/General Ledger, would make postings into an account period even if it was closed. Fixed.
  
  
• Both customer and supplier invoices and credit notes could be entered into closed account periods. Fixed.
  
  
• Purchase Ledger/Accounts Payable, the Purchase Tax Analysis report did not work. Fixed.
  
  
• Purchase Ledger/Accounts Payable, Purchases by Area/Country Analysis report, scope dates could not be selected by using the find buttons, Fixed.
  
  
• Setting up account periods, if user clicks into the 'Open' input field when it is greyed out, they can not get out of it as the validation insists it must contain a 'Y' or a 'N', but nothing can be entered as it's readonly (greyed out). Fixed.
  
  
• When any list of transactions is displayed, there is normally a 'Print List' button. If this is clicked and the user selects 'Preview' a print preview is displayed, If the user clicked on this preview an error message would appear, and most likely the accounts program would close. Fixed.
  
  
• Purchase Orders, could some times generate sales tax/VAT amounts that were out by a few pence. Fixed.
  
  
• In the 'Money Received' and 'Sundry Payment' options, if the 'Tax Calc' button was used to create the amount and tax amount entries, the 'OK' button would remain greyed out. Fixed.
  
  
• When setting up SMTP details in Miscellaneous -> Defaults and Variables, if the user was using these company/organization SMTP details (as opposed to SMTP details in their login details), the changes did not take effect until the accounts system was restarted. Fixed.
  
  
• In the option 'SMTP Hosts for email Shots' if the user clicked on a host while editing another host, both hosts would end up sharing the same details. Fixed.
  
  
• eMail shots didn't work when the SMTP host/s were setup via the 'SMTP Hosts for email Shots' option. Fixed.
  
  
• When entering batched opening balances into customer or supplier accounts that have a sales tax/VAT element, the software would not allow a negative balance to be entered. Fixed.
  
  
• When importing sales or purchase transactions, any sales tax/VAT amounts were not being posted into the Nominal/General ledger (this bug crept in due to the substantial changes to sales tax/VAT handling in January 2012). Fixed.
  
  
• When working in customer or supplier details when running the accounts system in Level 1: Basic Functionality, if the user selected the 'Show Full details' option, the full details would be displayed, but the record would be locked, and remain locked until the lock timed out. Fixed.
  
  

v4.031 7th February 2012

• IMPORTANT: Supplier Invoices or Credit Notes entered prior to updating the software to v4.027 or or later, do not report the Sales Tax/VAT on the Sales Tax/VAT Period End report. Fixed.
  
  
• The download file was typically between 17mb and 20mb. This has now been reduced to only 10mb. When installed and one company/organization has set up, it takes a total of just under 40mb of disk space.
  
  
• AutoManager: Customer details (in Level 2) now lists all jobs for that customer.
  
  
• AutoManager: Jobs can now be created that are not associated with a vehicle or equipment. The option to do this is next to the list of jobs (new, see above) in customer details.
  
  
• When posting sales or purchase invoices, debit notes, or credit notes, a posting is made into the General Ledger (Nominal Ledger) for each item in the invoice. An option is now available that will gather together items that are using the same G/L (or N/L) account code and post them as one. If this posting method is selected (in setup), as the description of each item will be different, it has to use the description of the sales or purchase analysis code for the posting. If you have to to enter invoices with a large number of lines, you may find this very beneficial is reducing the number of G/L (N/L) postings. (this will be the default for new installations)
  
  
• Payroll: If an employee is taxed on a week/month 1 basis, this is now printed on the payslip after the tax code.
  
  
• In Stock Item Details, when running the accounts system in 'Level 1: Basic Level', the system would claim that any Sales Tax/VAT code entered was invalid. Also, it would only allow one digit codes to be entered, Fixed.
  
  
• Importing customer and supplier transactions, any tax codes and amounts did not import correctly. Fixed.
  
  
• Data Integrity Check, did not check the tax element of sales or purchase transactions correctly. Fixed.
  
  
• Sales and Purchase Invoices: when several items were added to an invoice, the sales tax/VAT calculated could some times be a penny out due to rounding issues. Fixed.
  
  
• Sales invoices and credit notes, if a stock item was selected that had a two digit sales tax/VAT code, an * appeared in the sales tax/VAT input field. Fixed.
  
  
• Sales invoices and credit notes, if copied using the 'Copy' button, any costs for stock items would get doubled up. Fixed.
  
  
• Any sales or purchase transactions entered into the system (that were not invoices, debit or credit notes) that have no Sales Tax/VAT amount, got flagged up as having a potential balance problem in the Sales Tax/VAT Period End report. Fixed.
  
  
• The decimal and thousands separators vary from country to country. They are often setup in the regional data that comes with the accounts system. However, if they are left blank, the software should get the value from the setup in Windows. It could not always get a value from Windows, whch caused numbers to be only partially displayed. Now if it does not have a value in the regional data file, and can not get a value form Windows, it defaults to a full stop for the decimal separator and a comma for the thousands separator.
  
  
• When operating the accounts system with remote data, ie. with the accounts system on a local PC and the data on a server connected via a LAN or VPN, if a new company/organization was created, it didn't work. Although the company/organization record existed, no data files were created. Fixed.
  
  

v4.030 28th January 2012

• Accounts Periods: can now edit the financial year for a particular account period.
  
  
• In supplier details, the 'Invoice Rct' and 'Credit Rcpt' options (in Level 1 in they are in the 'Quick Input' section called 'Invoice Received' and 'Credit Note Received') did not function correctly. Even if no payment details were given, the outstanding balance was always zero. Also, after entering an invoice, the tax amounts would be negative. This anomaly probably crept into the software v4.027. Fixed (when updating to v4.030, it will attempt to repair any incorrect data created by this issue).
  
  
• Sales Invoices, when invoicing from stock, the stock item description gets truncated in the stock movement details. Fixed.
  
  
• In Company/Organization details, a different location for the data can be specified. If a "\" was not attached to the end of the path, it wouldn't work. Fixed.
  
  
• In Company/Organizations details, the button to edit or display notes didn't work. Fixed.
  
  
• The options 'Money Received' and 'Sundry Payment' would not always allow the 'OK' button to be clicked if the input fields were entered in a certain order. Fixed.
  
  
• The options 'Money Received' and 'Sundry Payment' would post transactions with no sales tax/VAT element as being tax code 0. Where as they should have no tax code at all. Fixed.
  
  
• When setting up a new company/organization anytime in January, the financial year would always default to the following calendar year instead of the current calendar year. Fixed.
  
  

v4.029 21st January 2012

• Customer details, a find sales tax/VAT code button has been added to the 'default/override tax code' input field.
  
  
• Option added in the Help menu (at the bottom) to make it easy for users to report any bugs they discover in the software.
  
  
• Purchase Orders, when an order is created, stock received, and then picked up on a supplier invoice to build up the invoice, the stock item descriptions could vanish or get cut short. It also restricted the Sales Tax/VAT codes on each item to one digit. Fixed.
  
  
• When importing stock items, if a prefix was specified for the SKU, it did not import all the data fields into each stock record. If the import was re-run, it would then duplicate stock items. Fixed.
  
  
• Entering supplier invoice when running the software in 'Level 1: Basic Level Functionality', if the 'Find' screen is used to select the Sales Tax/VAT code, it wouldn't insert the selected Sales Tax/VAT code into the invoice. Fixed.
  
  
• Entering supplier invoice when running the software in 'Level 1: Basic Level Functionality', if the default currency for the supplier was not in the ledger currency, the correct currency was not selected. Although different currencies are not available when running in 'Level 1', they should still operate correctly as it's possible for some users to run in 'Level 1' and some in 'Level 2' on the same system. Fixed.
  
  

v4.028 19th January 2012

• When updating from Adminsoft Accounts v4.024 or an older version, any print or HTML layouts that have been edited can not be automatically updated. However, due to changes in the way in which sales tax/VAT is handled, some data fields on the old layouts are no longer valid. A message now appears during the update to warn users they may have to edit any layouts they have previously edited.
  
  
• When viewing customer details (in Level 2), if the customer had a default/overriding sales tax/VAT code set, every time the customer was viewed a diary entry would be created saying the code had changed. Fixed.
  
  
• Purchase Order created from stock item details, if the number of items in stock exceeded the maximum (as given in the stock item details), the quantity ordered would be a minus figure. Fixed.
  
  
• Purchase Orders: when entering an item into the order that is not carried in stock, if the sales tax/VAT code is only one digit, it would not be accepted unless a space was entered before the digit. Fixed.
  
  
• Purchase Orders: if the 'F' button was used to find a sales tax/VAT code, if the code selected was two digits, only the first digit would be inserted into the P/O. Fixed.
  
  
• Supplier invoices, when creating an invoice by selecting items off Purchase Orders, the first 15 characters could get missed off the stock item code/description. It would also not display the stock received history. Fixed.
  
  

v4.027 12th January 2012

• Sales Tax and VAT: There are now up to four different types of sales tax, and up to 100 tax codes, each containing a different rate of tax for each tax type. This is a BIG modification that makes the sales tax/VAT facility flexible enough to handle sales tax anywhere in the World (in theory!). Developed specifically with the USA and Canada in mind.
  
  
• Autocompete now available on many input fields. This is setup in the user details. So different users can set it up as they wish, or not at all if they do not wish to use it.
  
  
• Each set of ledgers (company/organization) set now be set up to use data in a location other than the default location.
  
  
• Option added to list full user access log (ie. for all users, not just individual users).
  
  
• The extra software modules AutoManager and Shop/Cafe Manager can now be selected at any time (previously could only be selected during software installation). They are selected in the company/organization details. The same also applies to payroll, which is currently United Kingdom specific, and so you may or may not require.
  
  
• Stock Find button added to Receive Stock & Return Stock forms, and also on the various stock reports.
  
  
• Multiple SMTP host details used for email shots restricted the host to 50 characters, login names and passwords to 15 characters each. These have been increased to 80, 40, and 20 characters respectively.
  
  
• When creating a P/O from stock item details, the P/O now defaults to the preferred supplier, or the first supplier in the list if there's no preferred supplier, and automatically puts that item on the first line. It also works out the quantity to order based on quantity in stock and the maximum stock holding required. The details can all be edited if necessary.
  
  
• HTML Customer Statement layout can now show monthly balances, as per printed layouts.
  
  
• HTML Sales Invoice layout can now show the delivery address.
  
  
• If a sales invoice/credit note layout has transaction notes placed on it, it should print (even though it says they are not for printing on the actual invoice/credit note input form), but didn't. Fixed.
  
  
• Profit and Loss report: if reporting by department, or for more than one period, the 'This Period' column does not report the correct figures (Year to Date is fine). Fixed.
  
  
• Payroll, when entering details for a new payslip, if the user clicked the button to view the employees previous payslip, it didn't work. Fixed.
  
  
• If an Estimate or Proforma invoice is created,and there is insufficient stock, if stock is then received, and the Estimate or Proforma converted into an Invoice, the Invoice still shows insufficient stock. Fixed.
  
  
• Sales invoices: when a stock item is invoiced that carries a surcharge, the surcharge is automatically added on the line below. But if the user then clicks back into the stock item code/details, when they move out of that input field another surcharge is added. Fixed.
  
  
• Remittance Advices, software modified due to problems caused by the thousands and decimals separator in some countries. The problem caused payments to be multiplied by 1,000. Fixed.
  
  
• When creating a Purchase Order, if the delivery address of another supplier is selected, the P/O would end up being for that supplier, instead of the original supplier. Fixed.
  
  
• If a new cash/bank account was created from the 'Cash/Bank Accounts' option, it would not always appear in the list of cash/bank accounts. Fixed.
  
  
• Tax types (for UK and other countries) not set up during creation of new company/organization. Only USA and Canada worked OK. Fixed.
  
  
• Trial Balance report (and list) did not print all accounts in account code order. Fixed.
  
  
• When creating new customer or supplier accounts, if the user clicked into the list of stock purchased, it would some times list stock items. This was erroneous data, which would not be there when the new account details are saved. The same thing would happen with transactions if the user clicked on the control to filter transaction type. Fixed.
  
  
Please note: if your software is v4.024 and older, and you update to v4.027 or later and you have edited any of the print or HTML layouts, you may need to replace some of the data fields after you have updated the software. This mainly affects invoices, estimates, and purchase orders, and is due to the change in sales tax/VAT.


v4.024 5th November 2011

• Customer Details (in Level 2), can now print list of stock purchased, delivery addresses, contacts, proforma invoices, advice notes, estimates, saved transaction, recurring invoices, letters/faxes/documents, disputes/quotes, and vehicles/equipment (when the AutoManager module is in use).
  
  
• Customer Details report (in Level 2), can now print almost everything associated with the account, including invoice/credit notes lines when printing transactions.
  
  
• Supplier Details (in Level 2), can now print list of stock supplied and list of P/O's. Also, total number and value of P/O's raised for a supplier is now displayed.
  
  
• Aged Debtors report could give a different 'Overdue' figure to the Aged Debtor summary displayed on screen, as it did not take unallocated payments or credit notes into account. Fixed.
  
  
• Supplier Details (in Level 2), can now print list of remittance advices, factors, contacts, proforma invoices, letters/faxes/documents, disputes/quotes.
  
  
• Supplier Details report (in Level 2), can now print almost everything associated with the account, including document (remittance, proforma, etc) lines if required.
  
  
• Saving screen/form images, will ask for location every time, defaulting to the last location used.
  
  
• When a new company/organization is entered, the system will now check to see if data already exists for it, and if it does it will not attempt to create a new set of ledgers, but will use the existing data.
  
  
• Sales invoices/credits notes, proforma invoices and estimates can now print a longer sales tax/VAT number. Also, the longer UK VAT code (EORI) doesn't produce a message suggesting it may be invalid.
  
  
• Sales Invoices/credits notes, proforma invoices and estimates, the 'Description/Stock Code' was limited to 50 characters due to space restrictions, this has now been increased to the full 65.
  
  
• Sales Invoices, if a stock item is selected, any 'Extra Description' will now appear on the line below.
  
  
• Sales Invoices, costs can be adjusted, even if the item is a stock item. Adjustments will be automatically applied to stock files where necessary.
  
  
• Layouts of invoices/credit notes, estimates, proforma invoices, delivery notes, and advice notes now have the option of using one of two 'Description/Stock Code' data fields. The standard length of 50 characters, or the full length of 65 characters.
  
  
• Aged Debtors and Aged Creditors on screen displays now have option not to show pence. Useful if you are dealing with large numbers, as it can make the information clearer.
  
  
• When backing up to a ZIP file, if the folder containing the company/organization data contains a sub-folder created by the user, the contents of that sub-folder get backed up too. When that ZIP backup is restored, if the sub-folder no longer exists, files that were in the sub-folder would get written into the company/organization data folder. If the sub-folder happened to contain an old copy of the data, this would be a problem, as files in the sub-folder would be restored after files in the main data folder, and so overwriting them. Fixed, if the sub-folder no longer exists, any files that were in it are ignored.
  
  
• When printing Purchase Orders that have been raised in a currency other than the ledger's default currency, the 'Price Each' still gets printed in the ledger currency. Fixed.
  
  
• Trial Balance and Profit and Loss reports can now be produced for a range of account periods, not just one account period.
  
  
• The additional modules, AutoManager and CafeManager can now be used for free with no time out. Just the same as the standard accounts system, our web site will be displayed up on exit, unless a Software Registration Key is purchased.
  
  
• Sales and purchase daybook report can now be filtered by department.
  
  
• List 'All Transactions' options for sales and purchases can now be filtered by department.
  
  
• Print layouts are now updated when ever the software is update. Unless the layout has been edited by the user, in which case it is left alone.
  
  

v4.021 15th October 2011

• Stock item details, increased width of price input fields to prevent any sideways scrolling when large numbers are entered.
  
  
• Email shots to customers and suppliers can now be sent using multiple SMTP accounts.
  
  
• When a form was started up from a 'Find' form, perhaps to create a new code or a new account, the 'Find' form remained in the foreground, preventing easy access to the new form just started. This problem crept into most 'Find' forms in v4.020. Fixed.
  
  

v4.020 8th October 2011

• Batched input of payments (customers and suppliers) now automatically allocate those payments to outstanding transactions. This facility can be disabled if the user wishes.
  
  
• 'Print List' option added to most setup forms. So things like departments, sales analysis codes, and so on can now all be printed out (or output to a chosen file format or print device).
  
  
• Purchase Orders, the user can now select in setup whether they want P/O numbers to be generated as soon as the create P/O option is selected, or only when a P/O is printed/saved.
  
  
• Purchase Orders can now use predefined free text, selected using the F12 key (as per sales invoices).
  
  
• Accounts Payable / Purchase Ledger, maximum number of current transactions was 500, if there were more than 500, the outstanding/aged balances show would be incorrect. This current transaction limit has been increase to 5,000, and in the event there are more than 5,000 , the outstanding/aged balances will still show the correct value. Also, a maximum of 10,000 historical transactions (ie. transactions with nothing outstanding) could be displayed, this has been increased to 65,000.
  
  
• Accounts Receivable / Sales Ledger, current transactions had the same problem detailed above.
  
  
• Sales Estimates could only be converted into Invoices, there is now an option to convert into Proforma if required.
  
  
• When creating a new Nominal Ledger (General Ledger) account, click on 'Save'. Everything is OK, except the 'Notes' remain grayed out. This input field should be available. Fixed.
  
  
• The Defaults and Variables option for customers would not allow an account format to be set up. Fixed.
  
  
• The Defaults and Variables option for suppliers did not check to see if an account format entered was valid. Fixed.
  
  
• Accounts Payable / Purchase Ledger, selecting the print formats for Remittance Advices and Debit Notes did not show all available formats, and did not always displayed the selected format. Fixed.
  
  
• Purchase Orders, unit cost of items calculated to two decimal places rather than the intended four. Fixed.
  
  
• Purchase Orders, order received showed a '0' in the sales tax/VAT column even if no entry on that line (free text). Fixed.
  
  
• Purchase Orders, order received showed different colored backgrounds in input fields which looked odd when free text was used. Fixed, background now all white.
  
  
• Purchase Orders, order received cursor didn't always follow a logical path when skipping through input fields. Fixed.
  
  
• Purchase Orders, when printed would show 0.00 in the 'Cost Each' and 'Amount' columns on blank lines or lines containing free text. Fixed. Note, after updating existing installations, the user must edit the print layout of the Purchase Orders, delete the 'Cost Each' and 'Amount' data items and replace with the 'Cost Each' and 'Amount' data items from the 'Items on Order' section (tab at the top of the form).
  
  
• Purchase Orders, when raised in a currency other than the ledger default currency, the 'Sell' price of an item could sometimes be miscalculated (even though this remains in default currency). Fixed.
  
  

v4.019 7th September 2011

• Human Resources, Employee Details, the 'Position' and 'Reports to' data fields increased in size from 20 characters to 30 characters.
  
  
• The print 'Statement' button on customer details defaulted to 'View HTML', this has now been changed to default to 'PRINT' (which will select the default printer).
  
  
• When creating sales invoices, if the price 'Each' column was set to less than four decimal places, when using discount or markup on cost, the amounts in the 'Amount' column could appear to be out by a penny due to rounding issues. Fixed.
  
  
• Creating a sales credit note, if entering an item that is out of stock, a message would appear, or depending on the settings, it may even prevent input of the item. Fixed.
  
  
• Accounts Receivable / Sales Ledger, when creating a credit note, entering a stock item for which there was no stock would still generate an 'out of stock' message, even though stock was being returned. Fixed.
  
  
• HR, in employee details, when creating an absence record or booking holidays, if the 'F' button was used to select a date, the creation of the record was abandoned. Fixed.
  
  
• HR, in employee details, when entering a new employee, when details are saved and user clicked on the 'Holidays/Absence' tab, the form displayed a page that was not cleared ready for data input. Fixed.
  
  
• Application installer misreported events in the installation log if it could not create the 'Adminsoft Accounts' folder, and reported some error messages. Fixed.
  
  
• When printing from a list, perhaps transactions, stock, etc. the selection of print devices under the 'Print' button always left off the last device (often a PDF creator). Fixed.
  
  

v4.018 29th August 2011

• Stock Control/Inventory, Stock Sales Analysis report now has option to show total cost of sales for each stock item.
  
  
• Accounts Receivable / Sales Ledger, Sales Analysis codes can now contain the COGS account code as well as the stock code. This allows you to set up any number of COGS accounts (previous only one could exist). Both accounts must must be used in the Sales Analysis code for perpetual inventory control. If the cost of an item is zero, or you're not invoicing from stock, the stock and COGS accounts will be ignored.
  
  
• Backup and Restore options now check to make sure the source or destination folder/file actually exist before enabling the backup/restore button.
  
  
• Accounts Payable/Purchase Ledger, there is now an option to include Proforma Invoices on a Remittance Advice.
  
  
• Human Resources, the number of paid days holiday an employee has remaining is now displayed in section where holidays are recorded/booked. In red if the employee has exceeded their entitlement. Also, in the absence summary report, an asterisk will appear next to the paid holidays figure if the employee has exceeded their entitlement.
  
  
• Accounts Receivable / Sales Ledger, Advice Notes, Estimates, and Proforma's could not be printed to print devices such as PDF file creators. Fixed.
  
  
• Maintain Users form: The 'Email user' button on the 'Email' page did not work. Fixed.
  
  
• Maintain Users form: When started from the start form (where you can select a set of ledgers) if user maintenance was selected, and the toolbar creation form selected, the window did not resize itself to fit the toolbar creation form. Fixed.
  
  
• Accounts Payable/Purchase Ledger, payment transactions created from remittance advices did not display the General/Nominal Ledger postings (although postings were made correctly). Fixed.
  
  
• Stock Control/Inventory, General Stock Report, if items listed in description order, some of the totals for the item would not print. It also would not filter by purchase discount code or purchase analysis code. Fixed.
  
  
• Aged Creditor and Debtor reports, when printing outstanding transactions, the column that should have shown the amount outstanding for each transaction actually showed the transaction value. Fixed.
  
  

v4.017 20th August 2011

• Accounts Receivable/Sales Ledger, List ALL Transactions option now shows totals at the bottom.
  
  
• Nominal/General Ledger, when editing a journal entry, if one or more of the transactions have appeared on a VAT/Sales Tax end of period report, the system will put up a warning message.
  
  
• When deleting a sales invoice, any items invoiced and taken out of stock are now put back into stock. The reverse happens with a credit note.
  
  
• Nominal/General Ledger, when editing a journal entry, if the original transaction contained a VAT/Sales Tax element, it would still appear in the VAT/Sales Tax period end report even if all tax codes were removed during editing. Fixed.
  
  

v4.016 12th August 2011

• Facility added to create repeat/recurring sales invoices.
  
  
• Nominal/General Ledger - a version of the Trial Balance is now available that allows the user to list the transactions for any account in the 'report'.
  
  
• Nominal/General Ledger - transactions can now be edited. A record (history) is kept of each edit.
  
  
• Can now delete contra transactions between customer and supplier accounts.
  
  
• Deleted transactions can now be permanently cleared out of the system up to a given date.
  
  
• Write Offs on both sales and purchase accounts did not insist user entered a VAT/Sales Tax code. But if no code was entered, even if there was no VAT/Sales Tax amount, the VAT/Sales Tax period end report would not include the write off transaction in the summary. The Write Off form now insists a VAT/Sales Tax code is entered.
  
  
• Batch payments in both ledgers would post the wrong amounts if there was more than one currency set up in the accounts system (for that company/organization). Fixed.
  
  
• Opening balances for suppliers when using the VAT/Sales Tax cash accounting scheme, all balances over 999.99 would not be posted correctly. Fixed.
  
  

v4.015 2nd August 2011

• List 'Saved Invoices/Credits' in Accounts Receivable (Sales Ledger) menu now renamed to 'List Saved Transactions', which is more accurate as it also lists Proforma's, Advice Notes, Debit Notes, and now also includes Estimates.
  
  
• When stock item quantity in stock falls to zero or less than zero, the total cost will now always be zero.
  
  
• When Adminsoft Accounts is installed, or the software is updated, a text file called install.log is created in the Adminsoft Accounts folder. This lists the basic operations performed, and any problems encountered. This installation log can now easily be viewed by selecting the option in the 'system' menu (off the 'Setup' menu).
  
  
• When creating a Purchase Order for a supplier that is not in the ledger base currency, the Purchase Order still used the base currency instead of the currency specified in the suppliers details. Fixed.
  
  
• Purchase Orders would not preview or print using HTML format. Fixed.
  
  
• Several users have reported error messages on startup saying vfpcompression.fll is invalid. It seems some Windows installations do not contain the file msvcp71.dll. This is now included with Adminsoft Accounts.
  
  
• If the accounts system was started up and a company/organization backed up off the main start up form, without actually going into the company/organization's ledgers, the code for the selected company/organization would not be saved. Also, if a user did go into a company/organization and then went back to the main start form and selected a different company/organization and backed that up, the wrong code would be saved. This had the effect of some backups not appearing to be recorded in the backup log, and some backups in the log being attributed to the wrong company/organization. Fixed.
  
  

v4.014 22nd July 2011

• Bank reconciliation improved substantially. Screen now shows total paid in, paid out, reconciled, unreconciled, and allows user to enter a temporary opening balance.
  
  
• Purchase Orders and Purchase Invoices: currency now displayed (if not in the ledger base currency) in red next to the total value, the same as on Sales Invoices.
  
  
• Sales Invoices can now be set to not quit after printing & posting.
  
  
• Record locking improved, when a major record such as account or stock item details is locked, it will tell the user when it was locked and who locked it.
  
  
• Sales Invoices, when invoicing from stock, and Purchase Orders, could display incorrect prices when operating in a currency other than the ledgers base currency. Fixed.
  
  
• When receiving goods into stock, if the quantity in stock was a negative figure, the total cost of stock could be miscalculated. Fixed.
  
  
• Payroll history is no longer showing, this bug possibly crept in around v4.010. Fixed.
  
  
• Purchase Order Processing: Defaults and Variables only showed one print format to select from. Suspect this bug appeared when HTML formatted output was introduced (v4.009 back in June'11). Fixed.
  
  
• Sales tax/VAT period end processing, if the next period end date was invalid, users could not exit the form until a correct date was entered. Fixed.
  
  

v4.012 12th July 2011

• If user details are set to display a web page in the background, but no URL has been supplied, it will default to Adminsoft's web site.
  
  
• When the accounts system was started up from a desktop icon or the Windows Start menu, it could not locate it's library. This would sometimes result in an error message, it would always prevent the ZIP file backup from working. This library was a new file introduced in v4.010 Fixed.
  
  

v4.011 11th July 2011

• Option added to allow users to select what action the system should take if there is insufficient stock during sales invoicing. Options are: ignore, warn user, or prevent sale.
  
  
• If a Software Registration Key has already been entered into the accounts system, it is now possible to enter a different one in order to upgrade. Previously, upgrading the software required the user to email a file to Adminsoft, which was then modified and emailed back.
  
  
• When clicking the 'F' button in some locations to search for a Nominal/General Ledger account code, it's context sensitive, and so often only specific types of account will be listed. This can make things easier of those people unfamiliar with Nominal/General Ledger, but can sometimes be a problem. So when the list is not a full list of accounts, an option will now appear at the bottom 'Show ALL accounts' that does exactly that.
  
  
• Perpetual Inventory accounting is now an option. A Nominal/General Ledger account can be specified for Cost of Goods Sold, and each Sales Analysis code can have a stock account associated with it.
  
  
• Purchase Ledger/Accounts Payable: Write off transaction postings to the Nominal/General Ledger were the wrong way around (debit & credit reversed). Fixed.
  
  
• Purchase Ledger/Accounts Payable: Locate Transaction option would only accept numbers in the 'Reference' input field. Fixed.
  
  
• Sales invoices, when invoicing from stock, if a stock item had 'OK to sell' set to 'N', it still allowed the item to be sold. Fixed.
  
  
• Sales invoices, credit notes, proforma, and estimates: when copied and they contained stock items, the item costs could sometimes get messed up. Fixed. Also, they no longer do a straight copy of costs, but re-cost all stock items, as costs may well have changed since the original document was created.
  
  
• eMail Shot option: still didn't include all customers or suppliers. If their name started with a lower case letter, they got left out. Fixed.
  
  
• Nominal/General Ledger: When setting up a new company/organization, and a new set of ledgers created, the system will automatically create a small number of accounts. Each account has a unique reference number. This did not function correctly, and so when users started creating their own accounts, they got cross linked with existing accounts. Fixed.
  
  
• Document layouts: there is now a minimum size that most objects can be set to. This is avoid the situation when a user sets an object height and width to 1, and then can no longer find it!
  
  

v4.010 25th June 2011

• Backups can now be to a ZIP file, with an option to email the ZIP file. The original option that copies each individual file into a folder remains. Restore can be from individual files as before, or from a ZIP file.
  
  
• Option added that lists all backups and restores made to company/organization data or system/layout data.
  
  
• HTML documents: if no transaction data, one line would often get displayed, usually from a previous document. Fixed.
  
  
• eMail Shot option: often would not automatically build up list of customers or suppliers as per the selection criteria. Due to problem with telephone numbers. Fixed.
  
  
• Report output to OpenOffice Calc reported values of 1,000 or over incorrectly. Fixed.
  
  
• Email was not taking it's smtp settings from user details (if any set up there), but always took them from the company/organization settings instead. Fixed.
  
  

v4.009 18th June 2011

• Allows output of forms like invoices, statements, using HTML templates. Uses place holders to position data. These templates are used when outputting to email or HTML file. Place holders use &'s in the HTML code. So for example customer name would be &customername& Some place holders for transaction line details (or transactions with Statements and Remittance Advices) are 'repeater' fields. Automatically repeating until all required data has been output.
  
  
• Report Layouts: text data that was too long for the size of the data field got truncated to the nearest word. This has now been changed so it truncates to the nearest character, and then prints ellipsis (...) to show there is more data than can be seen. Also, each data field can be set in the layout to truncate to the nearest character or word, or with or without an ellipsis.
  
  
• The 'Getting Started' form seen when the accounts system is first installed, now remains until the user specifically sets it not to re-appear. It also contains most options necessary for the basic set up of the accounts system, and entering opening balances. As well as detailed instructions and advice on how to get going. Should make getting started quicker and easier.
  
  
• When the software is installed or updated, one of the first things the accounts software does when it starts up is to check the file structures in the 'system' folder and change where necessary, then create new index files. This takes place before any forms are displayed for user interaction. It helps to smooth the software update process.
  
  
• Nominal/General Ledger reports when output to Excel are now formatted better.
  
  
• Nominal/General Ledger: when entering journals the help text said a description for the batch was not mandatory, when in fact it was. The text has been changed. Also, if a batch was entered and a description or department code entered afterwards, the print and post buttons remained greyed out. Fixed.
  
  
• Nominal/General Ledger no longer insists on an account having a 'Report Group' code. As some accounts should not appear in P&L or Balance Sheet reports. But it will display a message alerting the user, as MOST accounts should appear one of these reports.
  
  
• Database Fixing option, Correcting General Stock is now more comprehensive. Checks are correcting a much wider range of possible anomalies in the data. There was also a bug that could sometimes put the routine into an infinite loop, this is now fixed.
  
  
• In printed layouts, when using a font other than Courier New, and especially if using right justification, the @Z format can appear to the left of the number when previewed or printed out. Fixed.
  
  
• Document layout editing: would allow any data object to be placed in any section of a document. Potentially causing some strange problems! Data objects are now limited to the document section for which they were intended.
  
  
• Reports and documents can now be output to Open Office Writer and Calc.
  
  
• Facility added to allow discount % in sales invoices/credit notes to be rounded to nearest 1%, .5%, .25%, .1%, or not rounded at all. The discount % is calculated at the time the invoice is printed/viewed, and is not necessarily quite the same as any discount in the sales discount code file due to possible rounding errors and quantity breaks. Hence this facility to control the rounding, if required. Note: in HTML layouts, only the necessary decimal places will be displayed (none if the rounding is to the nearest 1%), but the print layouts will always show two decimal places regardless of whether they are required. For example, if 5.71% was rounded to the nearest .5%, it would print as 5.50% Where as in an HTML document it would display as 5.5%
  
  
• Printers that had a name starting with a backslash (usually networked printers) would be greyed out in the list of printers, and selection would not be possible. Fixed.
  
  
• Nominal/General Ledger, journal entry. Print batch now includes the posting number.
  
  
• Stock Control, stock data import, if there are any data fields in the imported data that are not required, user can now specify them as blank. They will then be ignored.
  
  
• Users can select a back ground called 'Adminsoft Accounts user page' which will display Adminsofts web page in the accounts system background. If this option is used, when the application exits it will not fire up the users browser.
  
  
• Backup & restore options now create a log of any backups/restores made. When restoring data, the user can list all backup locations and select one. Very useful for those users that backup to a different folder each time, or rotate folders.
  
  
• VAT/sales tax period end: when running a report for previous VAT/sales tax period end, transactions that had been deleted in the Nominal/General Ledger since the VAT/sales tax end was run did not appear in the report. Fixed.
  
  
• VAT/sales tax period end: when 'undoing' last VAT/sales tax period end, the Nominal/General Ledger transactions were not processed (ie. 'undone'). Fixed.
  
  
• Nominal/General Ledger would allow transactions to be deleted even if they had been processed for a VAT/sales tax period end. Fixed.
  
  
• Document Layouts: user can now add notes about the layout. These notes do not get printed out on the document itself. But they do go with the layout if exported.
  
  
• Document Layouts: Import/Export only now uses one file, with the extension .LYT, and not two files (.FRX and .FRT) as before. This is in readiness for a new section on the web site that will allow print and HTML document layouts to be exchanged between users.
  
  
• Option added to enter opening balances into cash/bank accounts.
  
  
• The 'Getting Started' form seen when the accounts system is first installed, now remains until the user specifically sets it not to re-appear. It also contains most options necessary for the basic set up of the accounts system, and entering opening balances. As well as detailed instructions and advice on how to get going. Should make getting started quicker and easier.
  
  
• Importing purchase transactions: all payments were posted to the default bank account set up for sales, instead of the default account set up for purchases. Fixed.
  
  
• Stock Control - Can now delete file import definitions.
  
  
• Stock Control - File import had numerous issues. This section has now been redeveloped so it's more like the general supplier/customer details and transactions import routines. It's now easier to use and more reliable.
  
  

v4.006 18th April 2011

• Added form providing details of the International Association of Bookkeepers and the International Association of Accounting Professionals.
  
  
• When updating the accounts software, it can sometimes produce a message reporting missing files (or similar) when starting up, before it has had chance to update the database structures. Fixed.
  
  
• Find facility added to the report view function. This can search a report forwards or backwards, case sensitivity is user selectable.
  
  
• Users can now copy lines out of the report viewer by using the mouse cursor to highlight one or more lines then Ctrl-C to copy to clipboard.
  
  
• Record locking: Record locks older than 12 hours are now ignored.
  
  
• Receiving payments: as well as handling a commission, they can now handle a transaction fee. This has been necessary to handle PayPal payments.
  
  
• Refunding customers: the commission was not reversed. Fixed.
  
  

v4.005 9th April 2011

• Stock Control, sales discount, markup on cost not working properly when stock item price is inclusive of VAT/sales tax. Fixed.
  
  
• When mouse cursor goes over a button or link that brings up a web page, the cursor takes the form of a hand. This is the same kind of behavior seen on web pages, so the user knows it's a web link.
  
  
• In Level 1: P/L invoice does not show the N/L posting number. Fixed.
  
  
• In Level 1: P/L invoice VAT column is different color to other columns when user defined colors are used. Fixed.
  
  
• In Level 1: P/L invoice, should be able to change the payment due date, but it's greyed out. Fixed.
  
  
• Payroll, P35 and P60 reports included tax & NI figures from payslips that had been created but not paid/processed. Fixed.
  
  
• Payroll, when a payslip is created but not paid, if the payroll moves on to next period, the payslip can no longer be paid/processed. Although it still exists, it is ignored.
  
  
• Customer Purchase Order reference in sales invoices increased width from 15 characters to 20.
  
  
• Aged creditors and debtors reports, including transactions, now show the payment due date for each invoice.
  
  
• Stock Control, could not add a new stock item when database was empty, unless the accounts system was re-index first. Fixed.
  
  
• Index files are now compact, so data access is very slightly faster.
  
  
• Added option providing details of the book by Yogesh Patel called 'Free Accounting with Free Software'. This book is about basic accounting, based on Adminsoft Accounts.
  
  

v4.004 4th April 2011

• P/L & P/
• When a supplier invoice is created from a P/O, and the invoice subsequently deleted, the P/O is still flagged as 'invoiced', and can not be re-invoiced. Fixed.
  
  
• Purchase Orders, Item Received history also now shows invoice history, with link to invoice details.
  
  
• P/L invoice/credit note form, added a lot more help text when user moves mouse cursor over objects.
  
  
• Employee details, Map, Label, Clipboard, Image, and Print buttons were almost always greyed out. Fixed.
  
  
• Adminsoft Accounts folder is now always installed in C:\Program Files (unless the user chooses otherwise), regardless of Windows version.
  
  
• Sales discount 'markup on cost' was not using default set up in stock control if no sales discount code in the stock item details. Fixed.
  
  
• Payroll, NIC's, have removed the band Earnings Threshold, and replaced with Secondary Threshold, Primary Threshold, and Upper Accrual Point.
  
  
• From v4.000 the data update was not working when the database structure was updated. Fixed.
  
  
• When re-index system files, it will now check and report if any of these files are missing.
  
  

v4.003 28th March 2011

• Changed advert text on documents from "FREE Accounts Software: www.adminsoftware.biz" to "Accounts software from www.adminsoftware.biz"
  
  
• Document layouts: if the size of the layout was reduced the advert could vanish. This has now been changed so the advert always stays in the bottom right hand corner. Applies to Freeware only.
  
  

v4.002 28th March 2011

• Error Log was only height re-sizeable, now width re-sizeable.
  
  
• N/L, enter journals, possible to enter a batch, 'posting' button greyed out, click on 'OK', and the form just quits. Have now changed it so it will always ask first, Allow user option of posting if the batch is OK, or ask whether they want to quit if the batch is ready for posting.
  
  
• S/L, invoices, the description input field needs to be wider At the moment, users find it difficult to gauge how much space they have available. Fixed by allowing the invoice form to be dragged wider, there is also a setup option to default the form to be wider.
  
  
• The background color does not want to change, even after restarting the application Fixed.
  
  
• Reports ignore printer selection. Worked OK for selecting View, Excel, etc. But would not select devices such a Fax, or PDF file generator. Fixed. Problem due to FoxPro storing details of my printer in the report definition file ap_report.frx
  
  
• Payroll: when creating first period for a new payroll, it selected wrong period end date and would not allow user to correct it. Both problems fixed.
  
  

v4.001 23rd March 2011

• Suggested by user: In backup, it would be better after backing up for the form to remain, saying what it has just done, and indicating if successful. Also, when backing up system, it copied files into selected folder, but also created two folders in there that were empty? Fixed.
  
  
• Suggested by user: In S/L when creating a new invoice for new client, bring up inv form, then type in customer a/c code you wish to use. Find form then comes up, and you click 'New'. The system now remembers the a/c code that had been typed in and uses it for the new a/c.
  
  
• Loading up saved invoices in S/L caused a message to appear saying quantity too large. Fixed.
  
  
• Employee details, employee status had 'Divorced' and 'Widowed' spelt wrong. Fixed.
  
  
• Employee details, payroll page, user got trapped in 'Tax Code' input field if they don't know any valid UK tax codes. Fixed.
  
  
• Setting up a company/organization, if the country was USA or Canada, the state or province was not checked for validity (to enabled 'OK' button) until user pressed Enter or Tab on the keyboard when the cursor had gone to the top of the form. Fixed.
  
  
• Install screen, entering users details for registration, if user entered an invalid country, they could not click 'Cancel' to exit the application until they entered a valid country. Fixed.
  
  

v4.000 19th March 2011

• Setup Users, paginate the user details, pages: Security, Appearance, Email, General. Included SMTP login & password stuff in here to override the main setup. Can also specify Outlook or Chilkat email.
  
  
• When creating a new set of ledgers:
  
  
• S/L Defaults & Variables. Next Delivery Address Number is 0, should be 1
  
  
• S/L Defaults & Variables. Customer name/address upper case only is blank, should be 'N'
  
  
• P/L Defaults & Variabels, Next Factor Number and Next Contact Number start at 0 instead of 1
  
  
• P/L Defaults & Variabels, Supplier name/address upper case only is blank, should be 'N'
  
  
• N/L Defaults & Variables. Asset Types: 'Asset A/c', 'Depn Debits', 'Depn Credits' all blank?
  
  
• S/C Defaults & Variables. Next Movement Header & Next Stock Item Number both 0, should be 1
  
  
• N/L Next Account number is set to 0, it should take into the accounts automatically created.
  
  
• N/L P&L & B/S report types: Cost of Sales should be an 'expense'. Fixed.
  
  
• Cash Accounting scheme: Need to be able to select individually for S/L and P/L to allow for 'hybrid' cash accounting schemes.
  
  
• N/L inputting new account. If details not all correct, user should be warned when they click on 'OK' button. As they think the account has been saved when it has not.
  
  
• Once a payroll has been created, it can not be deleted? Fixed.
  
  
• Change code facility added: payment types, departments, currency, sales analysis codes, and purchase analysis codes.
  
  
• S/L and P/L: bring up account details, then without entering anything or clicking any where on the form, click away onto another form and the 'find account' form pops up? Fixed.
  
  
• Backups: options for backing up layouts and system.
  
  
• Report listing Special Prices for all stock items & all customers.
  
  
• Improved look of bar graphs (better arrows, more vertical graph lines that are now accurate placed).
  
  
• What about voiding invoices created in error? So they remain in the customers list of transactions, but all N/L postings are deleted, and they have no bearing on turnover/tax figures. Would be a better option than deleting? Alternatively, what about an option to show deleted transactions in the customers list of transactions? May be a better idea? Would be easy to do. Can now show deleted trans in an account.
  
  
• When sending out single emails, it is now selectable: Chilkat (Adminsoft Accounts built in email system) or Outlook, depending on the users settings.
  
  
• Need to add totals to most lists of transactions.
  
  
• Layouts, prevents user entering invalid numeric field formats, such as "999,999.00"
  
  
• No longer restricted to using codepage 1252, although an external config.fpw can be created containing codepage=1252 to over ride the internal file. NOTE: THIS OPTION WITHDRAWN LATER.
  
  
• Added procedures for performing screen and form dumps.
  
  
• Make most forms vertically resizeable, some horizontally resizeable
  
  
• Make all modeless forms closeable from top right hand corner.
  
  
• Can set an Accounting System date, instead of it using the computer date. Applies to transaction dates ONLY.
  
  
• Can to edit more items in 'Change Transaction Details'. These include: outstanding amount, date appeared on VAT/tax period end.
  
  
• Time access restriction on user login details. Also prevent access on certain days.
  
  
• N/L setup periods, when a period is created or saved, the year start & end dates, and perhaps other period related stuff, are all re-calculated and then re-displayed.
  
  
• Fixed size of all forms that should not be resizeable.
  
  
• Fixed minimum height & width on resizeable forms to prevent user making them too small.
  
  
• Allowed delivery addresses to be created from invoice screen.
  
  
• Stock report, that for any given date will show how many items were in stock. Could make this more sophisticated by printing for a given period, then it could show stock movement for the period, with opening and closing stock levels.
  
  
• S/L, when invoicing based on cost use the last cost entered on the system (or alternative as defined by user) rather than an average as it does now. ie. user now has option of FIFO, LIFO, average, or cost LIST.
  
  
• Sorted out the display color setup.
  
  
• S/L, P/L, and S/C main account screens keep flashing up Find list even when a record is already selected? Fixed.
  
  
• New valid/find routines for em_employee_details. As per SL & PL account details.